Work Van

2017
Promaster city
OWNER’S MANUAL
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name features and equipment that are either standard or op-
FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore. description of features and equipment that are no longer
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of disregard any features and equipment described in this
accidents. manual that are not on this vehicle.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are and specifications, and/or make additions to or improve-
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non- ments to its products without imposing any obligation
drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans- upon itself to install them on products previously manu-
portation. factured.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
Copyright © 2017 FCA US LLC
SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1
1
2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 2
3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 3
4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 4
5 STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 5
6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 6
7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 7
8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 8

9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 9
10 INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 10
INTRODUCTION 1
CONTENTS
䡵 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
䡵 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . . .6
䡵 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 䡵 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . . .7
4 INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Congratulations on selecting your new FCA US LLC ve- Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
hicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, contains the information you desire.
distinctive styling, and high quality.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis- of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and illustra-
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you tions may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to read
these publications carefully. Following the instructions and Consult the following table for a description of the symbols
recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this
enjoyable operation of your vehicle. Owner’s Manual:
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it should
be stored in the vehicle for convenient referencing, and
remain with the vehicle when sold.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained techni-
cians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about your
satisfaction.
INTRODUCTION 5
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS If you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against oper- miss important information. Observe all Warnings and
ating procedures that could result in a collision, bodily Cautions.
injury and/or death. It also contains CAUTIONS against
procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle.
6 INTRODUCTION
VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The New Vehicle Limited Warranty does not apply to body The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the
modifications or special equipment installed by van left front corner of the instrument panel, visible through
conversion/camper manufacturers/body builders. U.S. the windshield. This number also appears on the vehicle
residents refer to the Warranty Information book, Section frame and underbody as well as the Automobile Informa-
2.1.C. Canadian residents refer to the “What Is Not Cov- tion Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle,
ered” section of the Warranty Information book. Such the vehicle registration and title.
equipment includes video monitors, VCRs, heaters, stoves,
refrigerators, etc. For warranty coverage and service on
these items, contact the applicable manufacturer.
Operating instructions for the special equipment installed
by the conversion/camper manufacturer should also be
supplied with your vehicle. If these instructions are miss-
ing, please contact your authorized dealer for assistance in
obtaining replacement documents from the applicable
manufacturer.
For information on the Body Builder’s Guide refer to
www.rambodybuilder.com. This website contains dimen-
sional and technical specifications for your vehicle. It is Vehicle Identification Number
intended for Second Stage Manufacturer’s technical sup-
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
port. For service issues, contact your authorized dealer.
INTRODUCTION 7
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
1
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may
lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 ▫ To Lock The Doors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
▫ Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 ▫ Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . . .16
▫ Locking Doors With A Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 ▫ Key Fob Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
䡵 SENTRY KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 䡵 DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 ▫ Locking The Doors From The Outside . . . . . . . .18
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 ▫ Unlock The Doors From The Outside. . . . . . . . . .19
䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED . . .14 ▫ Unlocking The Rear Cargo Area From Inside The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
▫ Sliding Side Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
▫ Child Lock System — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . .20
▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
▫ Auto Unlock Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
▫ Security System Manual Override . . . . . . . . . . . .15
䡵 WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
▫ Power Windows — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
▫ To Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 ▫ Important Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
䡵 SLIDING SIDE DOOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 ▫ Seat Belt Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
▫ Opening And Closing From Outside The Vehicle .24 ▫ Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) . . . . . . . . .38
▫ Opening And Closing From The Inside . . . . . . . .25 ▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
▫ Child Lock System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 ▫ Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
▫ Key Emergency Lock (KEL) Device . . . . . . . . . . .25 䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . .68
䡵 DOUBLE REAR SWING DOORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 䡵 SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
▫ Opening/Closing The First Swing Door From ▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
The Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
▫ Emergency Opening Of The First Swing Door
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
From The Inside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
▫ Opening The Second Swing Door . . . . . . . . . . . .26
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . .26 The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
▫ Occupant Restraint Systems Features . . . . . . . . .26
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS Ignition Key Removal
The key fob contains the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) key 1. Place the gear selector in PARK.
fob with an integrated key. To use the mechanical key, 2
2. Rotate the key to the STOP/OFF/LOCK position.
simply push the mechanical key release button.
3. Remove the key from the ignition switch lock cylinder.
Key Fob
1 – Key Blade Release Button Ignition Switch Positions
2 – Driver Passenger Unlock Button 1 — STOP (OFF/LOCK)
3 – Lock Button 2 — MAR (ACC/ON/RUN)
4 – Cargo Lock/Unlock Button 3 — AVV (START)
To order duplicate keys, please contact the authorized

dealer.
WARNING! WARNING! (Continued)

• Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the transmis- • Do not leave children or animals inside parked
sion into PARK, apply the parking brake, and re- vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
move the key fob from the vehicle. When leaving the cause serious injury or death.
vehicle, always lock your vehicle. In case you switch
off the vehicle and the transmission is not in PARK CAUTION!
position, a warning message will appear on the
cluster which suggests you to shift the transmission An unlocked vehicle is an invitation. Always remove
into PARK position and, then, you can remove the the key from the ignition and lock all the doors when
key within 15 seconds. If 15 seconds expire, you have leaving the vehicle unattended.
to rotate the key from OFF/LOCK position to ON/ Locking Doors With A Key
RUN position and come back to OFF/LOCK position
in order to remove the key. You can insert the key with either side up. To lock the door,
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to turn the key to the right. To unlock the door, turn the key
an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a to the left. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Main-
vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of rea- taining Your Vehicle” for maintenance procedures.
sons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally Key-In-Ignition Reminder
injured. Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector. Opening the driver’s door when the key is in the ignition
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in and the ignition switch position is OFF/LOCK sounds a
a location accessible to children. A child could oper- signal to remove the key.
ate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
(Continued)
SENTRY KEY
CAUTION! (Continued)
The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unauthor- • The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compat-
ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system ible with some aftermarket remote starting systems. 2
does not need to be armed or activated. Operation is Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or problems and loss of security protection.
unlocked.
The system uses ignition keys which have an embedded All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have been
electronic chip (transponder) to prevent unauthorized ve- programmed to the vehicle electronics.
hicle operation. Therefore, only keys that are programmed Replacement Keys
to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
NOTE: Only keys that have been programmed to the
NOTE: A key which has not been programmed is also vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle. Once a
considered an invalid key, even if it is cut to fit the ignition Sentry Key has been programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
switch lock cylinder for that vehicle. programmed to any other vehicle. When having the Sentry
If the vehicle security light is on after the key is turned to Key Immobilizer System serviced, bring all vehicle keys
the ON/RUN position, it indicates that there is a problem with you to an authorized dealer.
with the electronics. The VIN is required for authorized dealer replacement of
keys. Duplication of keys may be performed at an autho-
CAUTION! rized dealer.
• Always remove the Sentry Key from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
(Continued)
General Information signals. Every intrusion attempt causes three continuous
alarm cycles. Every alarm cycle lasts for 30 seconds. For 26
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
seconds, the horn will sound, and the turn signal lights will
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
flash. For four seconds, it will pause. After a maximum of
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and 10 alarm cycles, only the turn signal lights will flash until
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). the next alarm activation.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
Rearming Of The System
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
If the system has not been disabled, the Vehicle Security
2. This device must accept any interference received, in- Alarm will rearm itself after processing all the alarm cycles
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera- related to the intrusion attempt. If the condition which
tion. initiated the alarm is still present, the system will ignore
that condition and monitor the remaining doors and igni-
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
tion.
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment. To Arm The System
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED The Vehicle Security Alarm will set when you use the key
fob to lock the doors. If a door or the hood is not properly
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors and shut, the alarm system will exclude the related door from
ignition for unauthorized operation. When the Vehicle protection.
Security Alarm is activated, interior switches for door locks
are disabled. The system provides both audible and visible
To Disarm The System NOTE: The key fob may not be able to be detected by the
vehicle if it is located next to a mobile phone, laptop or
Use the key fob to unlock the door and disarm the system.
other electronic device; these devices may block the key
To exit the alarming mode, push the key fob unlock button 2
fob’s wireless signal.
and open the door.
The vehicle security alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously
described arming sequences has occurred, the vehicle
security alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in
the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a
door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the
vehicle security alarm.
Security System Manual Override
The vehicle security alarm will not arm if you lock the
doors using the manual door lock plunger.
Key Fob
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY
1 – Key Blade Release Button
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors from 2 – Driver Passenger Unlock Button
distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand- 3 – Lock Button
held key fob. The key fob does not need to be pointed at the 4 – Cargo Lock/Unlock Button
vehicle to activate the system.
To Unlock The Doors Programming Additional Key Fobs
Cargo Vehicle (Canada) — If Equipped Refer to “Sentry Key” in this section for further informa-
tion.
Push and release the unlock button on key fob to unlock
the front two doors. Push and release the Cargo unlock If you do not have a programmed key fob, contact your
button on key fob to unlock the cargo area (side lateral authorized dealer for details.
sliding doors and rear doors). The turn signal lights will
Key Fob Battery Replacement
flash to acknowledge the unlock signal.
NOTE: Perchlorate Material – special handling may apply.
Cargo Vehicle (United States) — If Equipped
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
Push and release the unlock button on key fob to unlock all
The recommended replacement battery is CR2032.
doors. Push and release the Cargo unlock button on key
fob to unlock the cargo doors. The turn signal lights will 1. Push the mechanical key release button and release the
flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. mechanical key to access the battery case screw located
Passenger Vehicle on the side of the key fob.
Push and release the unlock button on key fob to unlock all 2. Rotate the screw located on the side of the key fob using
doors. Push and release the Cargo unlock button on key a small screwdriver.
fob to unlock the cargo doors. The turn signal lights will
To Lock The Doors
Push and release the lock button on the key fob to lock all
doors. The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will
chirp to acknowledge the signal.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle: 2
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
Key Fob Screw Location NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
3. Take out the battery case. Remove and replace the by the party responsible for compliance could void the
battery observing its polarity. user’s authority to operate the equipment.
4. Refit the battery case inside the key fob and turn the
screw to lock it into place.
DOOR LOCKS Locking The Doors From The Outside
Locking With A Key Fob
Power Door Locks

Key Fob
The door locks can be locked or unlocked from inside the
1 – Key Blade Release Button
vehicle by using the door handle.
2 – Driver Passenger Unlock Button
• To lock the doors, push down on the door handle. 3 – Lock Button
4 – Cargo Lock/Unlock Button
• To unlock the doors, pull up on the door handle.
Push and release the lock button on the key fob to lock all
doors. The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will
chirp to acknowledge the signal.
Locking With The Key Blade Unlocking With A Key Fob For Canadian Cargo Vans
(If Equipped)
Push and release the unlock button to unlock the front 2
doors. Push and release the Cargo unlock button to unlock
the side sliding doors and the rear cargo doors. To lock the
doors, push and release the lock button on the key fob. The
turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to
acknowledge the signal.
Unlocking With The Key Blade
Push the Key Blade Release Button to expose the key blade,
insert the key blade into the driver door exterior lock
cylinder and turn the key counterclockwise to unlock the
Key Blade Released all doors.
Push the Key Blade Release Button to expose the key blade, Unlocking The Rear Cargo Area From Inside The
insert the key blade into the doors exterior lock cylinder Vehicle
and turn the key clockwise to lock the front door.
Pull up on the lock/unlock lever located on the drivers
Unlock The Doors From The Outside door panel to the 1st detent to unlock all doors from inside
Unlocking With A Key Fob For All Passenger Vans and the vehicle.
US Cargo Vans (If Equipped)
To unlock all the doors, push and release the unlock button
on the key fob. The turn signal lights will flash to acknowl-
edge the unlock signal. Push and release the Cargo unlock
button to unlock the rear cargo doors only.
Sliding Side Doors It can be engaged only with the sliding side door open:
Unlocking With A Key Fob
Push and release the cargo unlock button on the key fob to
unlock the sliding side doors. To open one of the sliding
side doors, pull the handle out from the bottom, then slide
the door towards the rear of the vehicle until it locks into
place and cannot go any further. The turn signal lights will
Unlocking With The Key Blade
Push the key blade release button to expose the key blade,
insert the key blade into the driver exterior door lock
cylinder and turn the key counterclockwise to unlock all
doors. Child Lock System
To Engage Or Disengage The Child-Protection Door Lock
Closing And Locking From Outside System
Grab the side door handle and push towards the front of
1. Open the rear door.
the vehicle. Once the side door is secured in the full closed
position, reverse either of the unlocking modes above to 2. Insert the tip of the emergency key into the lock and
lock the sliding side doors. rotate to the lock or unlock position.
Child Lock System — If Equipped 3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
This system prevents the sliding side doors to be opened The device remains engaged even if the doors are unlocked
from the inside. remotely.
WINDOWS
WARNING!
Power Windows — If Equipped
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision. 2
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from
the outside when the Child-Protection locks are en-
gaged (locked).
NOTE: For emergency exit from the rear seats when the
Child-Protection Door Lock System is engaged, manually
raise the door lock knob to the unlocked position, roll
down the window, and open the door using the outside
door handle.
Auto Unlock Doors
This feature unlocks all doors when the driver door is
open.
Power Window Switch Panel
NOTE: If the passenger door is open, only the passenger
door is unlocked. This procedure is the same for the rear 1 – Rear Window Control Buttons – If Equipped
and side doors as well. 2 – Driver Passenger Window Control Buttons
3 – Passenger Window Lock Button
The control on the left front door panel has up-down

switches that give you fingertip control of all power
windows. There is a single opening and closing switch on
the front passenger door for passenger window control.
NOTE: The key off power delay feature will allow the
WARNING! (Continued)
power windows to operate for up to three minutes after the
ignition is turned OFF. This feature is cancelled when • Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in
either front door is opened. a location accessible to children. A child could oper-
ate power windows, other controls, or move the
The window opening mechanism is fitted with a security vehicle.
system (if equipped) that can detect the presence of an
obstacle whilst the window is closing; when this happens, Auto-Down Feature
the system activates and the movement of the glass is
The window switches are equipped with an Auto-Down
immediately reversed.
feature. Push the window switch for a short period of time,
If the presence of an object is detected and the system is release, and the window will go down automatically.
activated, it may be necessary to perform the reset proce-
dure by fully opening the windows. To stop the Auto-Down motion part way, pull up/push
down on the window switch briefly.
WARNING! NOTE: The power window switches remain active for up
to three minutes (depending on the accessory delay set-
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
ting) after the ignition switch has been turned OFF. Open-
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
ing either of the vehicle’s front doors will cancel this
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
feature.
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
(Continued)
Auto-Up Feature • On the rear doors (in addition to the condition for the
Lift the window switch to the detent for half a second, front doors)
release, and the window will go up automatically. • Fuse or battery are disconnected when the window is 2
moving.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
• The anti-pinching system is activated while the win-
auto-up operation, pull up/push down on the switch briefly.
dow is moving and the door is opening.
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to • 50 window movements without ever closing the win-
the detent for less than half a second and release it when dow.
you want the window to stop. • One door opening movements with the window mov-
ing, without ever closing the door.
WARNING! • One door opening movement with the window mov-
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window is ing, without ever closing the door.
almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the Proceed as follows for initialization:
window before closing.
1. Completely close the driver’s door window, keeping the
Power Windows System Initialization operating button pushed for at least five seconds after
the (upper) end of travel position.
The power windows may be reset if any of the following
occurs: 2. Proceed in the same way on the passenger’s side door
• On the front doors button and on the buttons of rear doors.
• Fuse or battery are disconnected when the window is
moving.
• 20 window movements without ever closing the win-
dow.
Wind Buffeting Opening/Unlocking With A Key Fob In the Canadian
Cargo Vehicle (If Equipped)
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure
on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle Push and release the unlock button on the key fob to unlock
may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down in certain the front two doors. Push and release the cargo unlock button
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence on the key fob once to unlock the passenger/cargo area (side
and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs open the front lateral sliding doors and rear doors). The turn signal lights will
windows together to minimize the buffeting. flash to acknowledge the unlock signal.
SLIDING SIDE DOOR Unlocking With The Key Blade
On Cargo versions, the sliding side door is fitted with a Push the key blade release button to expose the key blade,
spring-loaded latch that stops the door from opening any insert the key blade into the driver door exterior lock
further. To lock it, simply push the door as far as it will go; cylinder and turn the key counterclockwise to unlock all
to unlock it, pull forward firmly. doors.
Opening And Closing From Outside The Vehicle Closing/Locking With A Key Fob
Opening/Unlocking With A Key Fob In the Passenger Push and release the lock button on the key fob to lock all
Vehicle and US Cargo Vehicle (If Equipped) doors, including the cargo area (side lateral sliding doors
and rear doors). The turn signal lights will flash and the
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob to horn will chirp to acknowledge the lock signal.
unlock all doors.
Locking With The Key Blade
Push the key blade release button to expose the key blade,
insert the key blade into the driver door exterior lock
cylinder and turn the key clockwise to lock all doors.
Opening And Closing From The Inside The device can be engaged with the sliding side doors
open as follows:
Opening:
Pull the interior door handle switch to unlock the door, 1. Key Emergency Lock Device not engaged (doors re- 2
then pull the handle and slide the door towards the rear of leased)
the vehicle until it can go no further. 2. Key Emergency Lock Device engaged (fit the ignition
Closing: key in its seat and rotate clockwise), door locked
Pull the interior door handle switch to release the door and The device is released and the doors can be opened as
then push it towards the front of the vehicle. follows:
Child Lock System If the power is restored:

• By remote control.
This system prevents the sliding side doors being opened
from the inside. • Opening a front door by inserting the key into the key
pawl.
The child locks can only be engaged/disengaged with the
sliding side door open: If the power is not restored:
The device remains engaged even if the doors are unlocked • Opening the driver side door by key fob and the other
remotely. doors (passenger’s side and sliding side door) pulling
the inner handle.
Key Emergency Lock (KEL) Device
If the child lock was engaged and the previously described
The sliding side doors are provided with a device for locking procedure was carried out, operating the internal
locking all the doors using the lock in case of a power fault.
handle will not open the door but will only realign the door
lock knob. To open the door, the outside handle must be
pulled. The door central locking/unlocking button is not
disabled by the engagement of the emergency lock.
DOUBLE REAR SWING DOORS Emergency Opening Of The First Swing Door From
The rear double swing doors are fitted through a fastening The Inside
system which stops them when they reach an opening From inside the vehicle, use the interior door release
angle of approximately 90 degrees. mechanism located on the left rear trim panel.
To open them wider to an angle of 180 degrees, push the Opening The Second Swing Door
locking device (one on each side) and simultaneously open After having opened the first door, pull the handle located
the doors. on the door face toward the rear of the vehicle.
Using the key fob on the door, you can do the following:
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
• For Cargo versions with swing door/cargo doors: cen-
trally unlock the load compartment (sliding side doors + Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle
rear swing doors/tailgate), centrally lock all the doors. are the restraint systems:
• For versions with swing door: local unlocking/locking. Occupant Restraint Systems Features
Opening/Closing The First Swing Door From The • Seat Belt Systems
Outside • Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
To open the door, turn the key in the lock or push the cargo • Child Restraints
unlock button on the key fob and then pull the exterior
Some of the safety features described in this section may be
handle to the left. To close the door, turn the key in the lock
standard equipment on some models, or may be optional
or push the lock button on the key fob.
equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask your autho-
rized dealer.
Important Safety Precautions 4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
them or under their arm.
Please pay close attention to the information in this section.
It tells you how to use your restraint system properly, to 5. You should read the instructions provided with your 2
keep you and your passengers as safe as possible. child restraint to make sure that you are using it
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the properly.
risk of harm from a deploying air bag: 6. All occupants should always wear their lap and shoul-
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride der belts properly.
buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat. 7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing child back as far as practical to allow the front air bags room
restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the to inflate.
seat as far back as possible and use the proper child 8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle
restraint (refer to “Child Restraints” in this section for has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the side air
further information). bags will inflate forcefully into the space between occu-
3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat pants and the door and occupants could be injured.
belt properly (refer to “Child Restraints” in this section 9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified
for further information) should be secured in a vehicle to accommodate a disabled person, refer to the “If You
with a rear seat in child restraints or belt-positioning Need Consumer Assistance” section for customer ser-
booster seats. Older children who do not use child vice contact information.
restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should ride
properly buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert)
WARNING!
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or and outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle their
restraint. seat belts. The Belt Alert feature is active whenever the
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN position.
with a rear seat. Initial Indication
Seat Belt Systems If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even on in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime will signal for
short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver and a few seconds. If the driver or outboard front seat passen-
could cause a collision that includes you. This can happen ger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
far away from home or on your own street. BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in
the START or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they can Light will turn on and remain on until both outboard front
reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some of the seat belts are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat
worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front passenger
vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the seat is unoccupied.
risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle.
Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence are placed on the outboard front passenger seat or when
the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the vehicle
pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet 2
is moving above a specified vehicle speed range and the driver
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts, and
or outboard front seat passenger is unbuckled (if equipped
cargo is properly stowed.
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) (the outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the outboard BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your autho-
front passenger seat is unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning rized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deactivat-
sequence starts by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and ing BeltAlert.
sounding an intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning
sequence has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or
remain on until the seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard
warning sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat Belt
driver and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat belts Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the driver
are buckled. The driver should instruct all occupants to buckle and outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.
their seat belts. Lap/Shoulder Belts
Change Of Status All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped lap/shoulder belts.
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) unbuckles The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder
warning sequence will begin until the seat belts are buck- part of the seat belt to move freely with you under normal
led again. conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt will lock
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or
when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied. being thrown out of the vehicle.
BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or other items

• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more • Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat
wear your seat belt even though you have air bags. belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer • Two people should never be belted into a single seat
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled belt. People belted together can crash into one another
in a collision, hurting one another badly. Never use a
up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person,
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
no matter what their size.
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside WARNING!
of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and as low as possible and keep it snug.
using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including the
driver, should always wear their seat belts whether (Continued)
or not an air bag is also provided at their seating
position to minimize the risk of severe injury or
death in the event of a crash.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued)

• A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In a • A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the seat belt you from injury during a collision. You are more 2
is flat against your body, without twists. If you can’t likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to your wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed. are meant to be used together.
• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will • A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat
too high on your body, possibly causing internal belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or
injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced imme-
buckle nearest you. diately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt
• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far collision.
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
(Continued)
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust
the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles
equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and
pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
around your lap.
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
Pulling Out The Latch Plate

4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low across 6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
your hips, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its
lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down 2
the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully.
on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor
point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch
plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180 degrees
to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch
plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the
latch plate.
Positioning The Lap Belt
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and
not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw
any slack in the shoulder belt.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and front passenger seats, the top of the
shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to
position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or
squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage, and
move it up or down to the position that serves you best.
Adjustable Anchorage
NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows the
shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward
position without pushing or squeezing the release button.
To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull
downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked
Adjustable Anchorage
into position.
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will prefer
the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position, and if you
are taller than average, you will prefer the shoulder belt
anchorage in a higher position. After you release the
anchorage button, try to move it up or down to make sure
that it is locked in position.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
WARNING!
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your 2
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
• Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfort-
able and not resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
• Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts

Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including preg-
nant women: the risk of injury in the event of an accident
is reduced for the mother and the unborn child if they are
wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen and
across the strong bones of the hips. Place the shoulder belt
across the chest and away from the neck. Never place the
shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning Commercial Vehicle
devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt
The seat belt in the passenger seating position is equipped
in the event of a collision. These devices may improve the
with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
performance of the seat belt by removing slack from the
which is used to secure a child restraint system. For
seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size
additional information, refer to “Installing Child Restraints
occupants, including those in child restraints.
Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child Restraints”
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat section of this manual. The figure below illustrates the
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be locking feature for each seating position.
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are
single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air
bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
The front seat belt system is equipped with an Energy
Management feature that may help further reduce the risk
of injury in the event of a collision. The seat belt system has
a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in
a controlled manner.
Commercial Vehicle Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
Location
Passenger Vehicle occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the
ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the seat
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract completely in 2
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of
(ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system. For
webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occu-
additional information, refer to “Installing Child Restraints
pant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle
Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child Restraints”
until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
section of this manual. The figure below illustrates the
locking feature for each seating position. In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automati-
cally pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to remove
any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking
Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a seating
position that has a seat belt with this feature. Children 12
years old and under should always be properly restrained
in a vehicle with a rear seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
Passenger Vehicle Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) restraint.
Locations
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR with a rear seat.
and is being used for normal usage, only pull the seat belt
webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt. • Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
the entire seat belt is extracted. who are using booster seats. The locked mode is only
used to install rear-facing or forward-facing child
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts, restraints that have a harness for restraining the
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat child.
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Some of the safety features described in this section may be
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
standard equipment on some models, or may be optional
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask your autho-
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) lock-
rized dealer.
ing mode.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you in a
WARNING! collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) moni-
tors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring asso-
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the ciated with the electrical Air Bag System Components.
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) fea- Your vehicle may be equipped with the following Air Bag
ture or any other seat belt function is not working System Components:
properly when checked according to the procedures
in the Service Manual. Air Bag System Components
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could in- • Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
crease the risk of injury in collisions. • Air Bag Warning Light
(Continued)
• Steering Wheel and Column The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds
• Instrument Panel
for a self-check when the ignition switch is in the MAR/
2
• Knee Impact Bolsters ACC/ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunc-
tion in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag
• Supplemental Side Air Bags Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on
again after initial startup.
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch detected that could affect the air bag system. The diagnos-
Air Bag Warning Light tics also record the nature of the malfunction. While the air
bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic following occurs, have an authorized dealer service the air
parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition bag system immediately.
switch is in the AVV/START or MAR/ACC/
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the
ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch is in the
four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first in
STOP/OFF/LOCK position the air bag system is not on
the MAR/ACC/ON/RUN position.
and the air bags will not inflate.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may
eight-second interval.
deploy the air bag system even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment. • The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition
the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection.
Have an authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument
panel could mean you won’t have the air bag system to
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on
as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on,
Advanced Front Air Bag/Knee Impact Bolster Locations
stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as
you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag 1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags
system immediately. 2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental Passenger Knee
Air Bag
3 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts for both
the driver and front passenger. The front air bags are a WARNING!
supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver front • Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
air bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The panel during front air bag deployment could cause
passenger front air bag is mounted in the instrument panel, serious injury, including death. Air bags need room
above the glove compartment. The words “SRS AIRBAG” or
“AIRBAG” are embossed on the air bag covers (Continued)
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the
to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat belt
to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel. 2
buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Ad-
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an vanced Front Air Bags.
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or WARNING!
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint. • No objects should be placed over or near the air bag
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle on the instrument panel or steering wheel because
with a rear seat. any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in
a collision severe enough to cause the air bag to
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag Features inflate.
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver • Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers
and front passenger air bags. This system provides output or attempt to open them manually. You may damage
appropriate to the severity and type of collision as deter- the air bags and you could be injured because the air
mined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which bags may no longer be functional. The protective
may receive information from the front impact sensors (if covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open
equipped) or other system components. only when the air bags are inflating.
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear
output is used for more severe collisions. your seat belts even though you have air bags.
Front Air Bag Operation When the ORC detects a collision requiring the front air
bags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protec-
non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air bags.
tion by supplementing the seat belts. Front air bags are not
expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side
rollover collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as
frontal collisions, including some that may produce sub- the air bags inflate to their full size. The front air bags fully
stantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole colli- inflate in less time than it takes to blink your eyes. The
sions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. front air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain
the driver and front passenger.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, front air bags may deploy in crashes with little Knee Impact Bolsters
vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
deceleration.
driver and front passenger, and position the front occu-
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over pants for improved interaction with the front air bags.
time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not
good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have WARNING!
deployed.
• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions, bolsters in any way.
and also are needed to help keep you in position, away • Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
from an inflating air bag. bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
2
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver Knee
Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the
steering column. The Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
provides enhanced protection during a frontal impact by
working together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and
front air bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Your vehicle is equipped with two types of supplemental
Side Air Bags: Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
1. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs): The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
Located in the outboard side of the front seats. The during certain side impacts, in addition to the injury
SABs are marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIR- reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body
BAG” label sewn into the outboard side of the seats. structure.
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard
side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB deploys
through the seat seam into the space between the occupant
and the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed and
with such a high force that it could injure occupants if they
are not seated properly, or if items are positioned in the
area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an even greater
risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
Label Location
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other injuries
2. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side
(SABICs): Located above the side windows. The trim impacts, in addition to the injury reduction potential
covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or provided by the seat belts and body structure.
“AIRBAG.”
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side windows. The SABICs and SABs (Side Air Bags) are designed to
An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the headliner activate in certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint
out of the way and covers the window. The SABICs inflate Controller (ORC) determines whether the deployment of 2
with enough force to injure occupants if they are not belted the Side Air Bags in a particular impact event is appropri-
and seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area ate, based on the severity and type of collision. The side
where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an even greater risk impact sensors aid the ORC in determining the appropriate
of injury from a deploying air bag. response to impact events. The system is calibrated to
deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact side of the vehicle
WARNING! during impacts that require Side Air Bag occupant protec-
tion. In side impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy indepen-
• Do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough dently; a left side impact deploys the left Side Air Bags only
to block the deployment of the SABICs. The trim and a right-side impact deploys the right Side Air Bags
covering above the side windows where the SABIC only. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator of
and its deployment path are located should remain whether or not Side Air Bags should have deployed.
free from any obstructions.
• In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do not The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
install any accessory items in your vehicle which including some collisions at certain angles, or some side
could alter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger com-
sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that partment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled or
require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for offset frontal collisions where the front air bags deploy.
installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
roof of the vehicle for any reason. system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes.
WARNING! WARNING!
• Occupants, including children, who are up against or • Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously injured against the door or window. Sit upright in the center
or killed. Occupants, including children, should of the seat.
never lean on or sleep against the door, side win- • Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deploy-
dows, or area where the side air bags inflate, even if ment could cause you to be severely injured or
they are in an infant or child restraint. killed.
• Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) • Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to
are necessary for your protection in all collisions. more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air Bags
They also help keep you in position, away from an work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
inflating Side Air Bag. To get the best protection some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all.
from the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their Always wear your seat belt even though you have
seat belts properly and sit upright with their backs Side Air Bags.
against the seats. Children must be properly re-
strained in a child restraint or booster seat that is NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
appropriate for the size of the child. trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete
ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in
certain side impact events.
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with the
with electrical Air Bag System Components listed below: air bag system.
2
Air Bag System Components If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) or all of the following may occur:
• The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
• Air Bag Warning Light
and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags
• Steering Wheel and Column deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction
• Instrument Panel rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet
or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact with
• Knee Impact Bolsters chemicals. They are not permanent and normally heal
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags quickly. However, if you haven’t healed significantly
within a few days, or if you have any blistering, see your
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
doctor immediately.
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
• Front and Side Impact Sensors particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
• Seat Belt Pretensioners process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air bag
inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin,
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation, rinse
If A Deployment Occurs the area with cool water. For nose or throat irritation, move
to fresh air. If the irritation continues, see your doctor. If
The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately after these particles settle on your clothing, follow the garment
deployment. manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed. Enhanced Accident Response System
If you are involved in another collision, the air bags will In the event of an impact, if the communication network
not be in place to protect you. remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending
on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine whether
WARNING! to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot the following functions:
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat • Cut off fuel to the engine.
belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor assem-
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
blies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately.
until the hazard light button is pressed. The hazard
Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller System
lights can be deactivated by pressing the hazard light
serviced as well.
button.
NOTE: • Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, the battery has power or for 15 minutes from the
but they will open during air bag deployment. intervention of the Enhanced Accident Response Sys-
tem.
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately. • Unlock the power door locks.
Enhanced Accident Response System Reset
Procedure
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on 2
functions after an event, the ignition switch must be your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF. • Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
compartment and on the ground near the engine compart- not function properly if modifications are made.
ment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air
the engine. bag system service. If your seat, including your trim
Maintaining Your Air Bag System cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way
(including removal or loosening/tightening of seat
WARNING! attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized
dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system could may be used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag
cause it to fail when you need it. You could be system for persons with disabilities, contact your
injured if the air bag system is not there to protect authorized dealer.
you. Do not modify the components or wiring, in-
cluding adding any kind of badges or stickers to the Event Data Recorder (EDR)
steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
of the instrument panel. Do not modify the front (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
side steps or running boards. deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed.
(Continued)
The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read
dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, the information if they have access to the vehicle or the
typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is EDR.
designed to record such data as:
Child Restraints
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts times, including babies and children. Every state in the
were buckled/fastened; United States, and every Canadian province, requires that
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accel- small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
erator and/or brake pedal; and, law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
• How fast the vehicle was traveling. Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled
up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics,
These data can help provide a better understanding of the children are safer when properly restrained in the rear
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. seats rather than in the front.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the WARNING!
EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
(e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded.
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold
However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could com-
even an infant on your lap could become so great that
bine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data
you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you
routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
are. The child and others could be badly injured. Any
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In restraint for the child’s size.
addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as
There are different sizes and types of restraints for children NOTE:
from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an • For additional information, refer to www.safercar.gov/
adult safety belt. Always check the child seat Owner’s parents/index.htm or call: 1–888–327–4236 2
Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your
child. Carefully read and follow all the instructions and • Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s
warnings in the child restraint Owner’s Manual and on all website for additional information: http://
the labels attached to the child restraint. www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/safedrivers-
childsafety-index-53.htm
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a
label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Stan-
dards. You should also make sure that you can install it in
the vehicle where you will use it.
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight or Age Recommended Type of Child Restraint

Infants and Toddlers Children who are two years old or younger Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible
and who have not reached the height or Child Restraint, facing rearward in the rear
weight limits of their child restraint seat of the vehicle
Small Children Children who are at least two years old or Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-
who have out-grown the height or weight point Harness, facing forward in the rear seat
limit of their rear-facing child restraint of the vehicle
Larger Children Children who have out-grown their forward- Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle
facing child restraint, but are too small to seat belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle
properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt
Child Size, Height, Weight or Age Recommended Type of Child Restraint

Children Too Large Children 12 years old or younger, who have Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of
for Child Restraints out-grown the height or weight limit of their the vehicle
booster seat
Infant And Child Restraints
WARNING!
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing in
the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach • Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used rear- cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats. younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle. It • Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
is recommended for children from birth until they reach with a rear seat.
the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible
child seats can be used either rear-facing or forward-facing Older Children And Child Restraints
in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their
weight limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-facing in
do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who have the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who
two years old. Children should remain rear-facing until are over two years old or who have outgrown the rear-facing
they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their weight or height limit of their rear-facing convertible child
convertible child seat. seat. Children should remain in a forward-facing child seat
with a harness for as long as possible, up to the highest weight
or height allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the forward-
facing limit for the child seat should use a belt-positioning
booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If the the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could
strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious 2
child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion
while the child’s back is against the seatback, they should use personal injury.
a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and belt-positioning
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
booster seat are held in the vehicle by the seat belt.
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
WARNING! comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over
the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback,
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step
or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision. test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle’s seat
The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow belt alone:
the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint. 1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of the
• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do vehicle seat?
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward be- 2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front of
cause it can loosen the child restraint attachments. the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the way
Remove the child restraint before adjusting the ve- back?
hicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has been
adjusted, reinstall the child restraint. 3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder be-
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in tween their neck and arm?
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, 4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching the
or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in child’s thighs and not their stomach?
(Continued) 5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
WARNING!
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched. arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of will not protect a child properly, which may result in
position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, serious injury or death. A child must always wear both
move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.
booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly.
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type Combined Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
Weight of the LATCH – Lower Seat Belt Only LATCH – Lower Seat Belt + Top
Child + Child Anchors Only Anchors + Top Tether Anchor
Restraint Tether Anchor
Rear-Facing Up to 65 lbs X X
Child Restraint (29.5 kg)
Rear-Facing More than 65 lbs X
Forward-Facing Up to 65 lbs X X
Forward-Facing More than 65 lbs X
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren (LATCH) seating positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether
Restraint System anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the following
table for more information.
2
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle
LATCH Label
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage
system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors and
Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system has three vehicle
anchor points for installing LATCH-equipped child seats.
There are two lower anchorages located at the back of the seat
cushion where it meets the seatback and one top tether Lower Anchor / Top Tether Locations (Passenger Vehicle)
anchorage located behind the seating position. These anchor- • Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per
ages are used to install LATCH-equipped child seats without Seating Position)
using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions may have • Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
a top tether anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH

What is the weight limit (child’s weight + 65 lbs (29.5 kg) Use the LATCH anchorage system until the
weight of the child restraint) for using the combined weight of the child and the child
LATCH anchorage system to attach the child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt
restraint? and tether anchor instead of the LATCH sys-
tem once the combined weight is more than
65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt No Do not use the seat belt when you use the
be used together to attach a rear-facing or LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear-
forward-facing child restraint? facing or forward-facing child restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH
anchorages if allowed by the booster seat
manufacturer. See your booster seat owner’s
manual for more information.
Can a child seat be installed in the center po- No Use the seat belt and tether anchor to install
sition using the inner LATCH lower anchor- a child seat in the center seating position.
ages?
Can two child restraints be attached using a No Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two
common lower LATCH anchorage? or more child restraints. If the center position
does not have dedicated LATCH lower an-
chorages, use the seat belt to install a child
seat in the center position next to a child seat
using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard
position.
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH

Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the Yes The child seat may touch the back of the
back of the front passenger seat? front passenger seat if the child restraint 2
manufacturer also allows contact. See your
child restraint owner’s manual for more in-
formation.
Can the head restraints be removed? Yes Second row all positions.
Locating LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are

found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback, below the anchorage sym-
bols on the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint. You
will easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap
between the seatback and seat cushion.
LATCH Anchorages
Locating Tether Anchorages anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some rear-
facing child restraints will also be equipped with a tether
strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach
There are tether strap anchorages behind each
rear seating position located on the back of the to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap
after it is attached to the anchorage.
seat.
Center Seat LATCH :
WARNING!
• Do not install a child restraint in the center position
using the LATCH system. This position is not ap-
proved for installing child seats using the LATCH
attachments. You must use the seat belt and tether
anchor to install a child seat in the center seating
position.
• Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. Please refer to “To Install A
LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint” for typical in-
Tether Anchorage Locations
stallation instructions.
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side. Always follow the directions of the child restraint manu-
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower facturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the restraint systems will be installed as described here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint 5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack in
If the selected seating position has a Switchable Automatic
the straps according to the child restraint manufactur-
Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat belt, 2
er’s instructions.
following the instructions below. See the section “Installing
Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” to check what 6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling
type of seat belt each seating position has. back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It
should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether
direction.
strap of the child seat so that you can more easily attach the
hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages. How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR (ALR)
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for Seat Belt:
that seating position. For some second row seats, you When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child
may need to recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by
restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved other occupants or being used to secure child restraints. An
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and
move it to its rear-most position to make room for the accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before installing a
child seat. You may also move the front seat forward to child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat
allow more room for the child seat. belt behind the child restraint and out of the child’s reach.
If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child restraint
installation, instead of buckling it behind the child re-
to the lower anchorages in the selected seating position.
straint, route the seat belt through the child restraint belt
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and
Restraints Using The Top Tether Anchorage” for direc- that they should not play with them.
tions to attach a tether anchor.
WARNING! WARNING!
• Improper installation of a child restraint to the • Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the re- child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
straint. The child could be badly injured or killed. child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions • Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint. exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand
only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching (ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
other items or equipment to the vehicle. belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat “switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
Belt webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into
lap/shoulder belt. the retractor. Refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode”
description in “Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors
(ALR)” under “Occupant Restraint Systems” for additional
information on ALR.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
2
Passenger Vehicle Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

Locations
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + Weight limit of the Always use the tether anchor when using the
weight of the child restraint) for using the Child Restraint seat belt to install a forward facing child re-
Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a straint, up to the recommended weight limit
forward facing child restraint? of the child restraint.
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the Yes Contact between the front passenger seat and
back of the front passenger seat? the child restraint is allowed, if the child re-
straint manufacturer also allows contact.
Can the head restraints be removed? Yes Second Row: The head restraints may be re-
moved from all positions.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the No Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating po-
seat belt against the belt path of the child sition with an ALR retractor.
restraint?
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable 1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating position. For
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR): some second row seats, you may need to recline the seat
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in and/or raise the head restraint to get a better fit. If the rear
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a seat can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle,
lap/shoulder belt. you may wish to move it to its rear-most position to make
room for the child seat. You may also move the front seat
forward to allow more room for the child seat.
WARNING!
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint. Do
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
child could be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions 3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint. “click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract 2
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will
Anchorage
hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is now in
the Automatic Locking mode.
WARNING!
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any webbing. Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat to
If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5. any location in front of the car seat, including the seat
frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the tether
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage
portion around the child restraint while you push the that is approved for that seating position, located
child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the section
seat. “Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH)
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the Restraint System” for the location of approved tether
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the anchorages in your vehicle.
tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints Using
the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a
tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling
back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It
should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to
install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage.
You may need to move the seat forward to provide
better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top
tether anchorage for that seating position, move the
child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is
available.
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for
the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If your
vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints,
raise the head restraint, and where possible, route the
tether strap under the head restraint and between the
two posts. If not possible, lower the head restraint and Tether Strap Mounting
pass the tether strap around the outboard side of the WARNING!
head restraint.
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the
increased head motion and possible injury to the
top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
child. Use only the anchorage position directly be-
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child hind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
restraint manufacturer’s instructions. tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack
in the strap.
Installing Child Restraints In Commercial Vehicles Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
This commercial vehicle is not designed for use as a family Belt
vehicle and is not intended for carrying children in the Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in 2
front passenger seat(s). Never install rear-facing child vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
restraints in this vehicle. Although the seat belt can be lap/shoulder belt.
locked to secure a child restraint, there are no tether
anchorages to complete the proper installation of a WARNING!
forward-facing child restraint. If you must carry a child in
a forward-facing child restraint, the passenger seat should • Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
be moved to the full rearward position and the child must child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
be in a proper restraint system based on its age, size and child could be badly injured or killed.
weight. Follow the instructions below to secure the child • Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
restraint using the seat belt. exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped

WARNING! with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) that is
Rear-facing infant restraints must never be secured in designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around
the passenger seat of a vehicle with a passenger air bag. the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking
In a collision, a passenger air bag may deploy causing clip. The ALR retractor can be “switched” into a locked mode
severe injury or death to infants riding in rear-facing by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor and then
infant restraints. letting the webbing retract back into the retractor. If it is
locked, the ALR will make a clicking noise while the webbing
is pulled back into the retractor. Refer to the “Automatic
Locking Mode” description in “Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractors (ALR)” under “Occupant Restraint Systems” for
additional information on ALR.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child
WARNING!
Restraints In This Vehicle
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating position.

2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint. Do
not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations For Front 4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
Bucket Seats against the child seat.
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will
lap/shoulder belt. hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is now in
the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
locked, you should not be able to pull out any webbing. Anchorage (Commercial Vehicle)
If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5. This vehicle is equipped with a tether strap anchorage 2
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap located behind the front passenger seatback, near the floor.
portion around the child restraint while you push the When installing a forward-facing child restraint, always
child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle secure the top tether strap to the tether anchorage.
seat. 1. Look behind the front passenger seat to find the tether
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the anchorage. You may need to move the seat forward to
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the provide better access to the tether anchorage.
tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether 2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for
strap. See “Installing Child Restraints Using the Top the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If your
Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether vehicle is equipped with adjustable head restraints, raise
anchor. the head restraint, and where possible, route the tether
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling strap under the head restraint and between the two
back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It posts. If not possible, lower the head restraint and pass
should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any the tether strap around the outboard side of the head
direction. restraint.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the 3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary. top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child Transporting Pets
restraint manufacturer’s instructions. Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a
collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or
pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS

A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). After
the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80
or 90 km/h) are desirable.
Tether Strap Installation While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
WARNING! Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-
mental and should be avoided.
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the child.
Use only the anchorage position directly behind the
child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a SAFETY TIPS
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes
Transporting Passengers
should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions 2
under which vehicle operations will occur. For the recom- NOTE: Never transport passengers in the cargo area.
mended viscosity and quality grades, refer to “Mainte-
nance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle.” WARNING!
CAUTION! • Do not leave children or animals inside parked

vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil cause serious injury or death.
in the engine or damage may result. • It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This injured or killed.
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and not • Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
interpreted as a problem. Please check your oil level with vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
the engine oil indicator often during the break in period. • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
Add oil as required. using a seat belt properly.
Exhaust Gas Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
WARNING! vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can even- loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into
tually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the ex-
these safety tips: haust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in or oil change. Replace as required.
confined areas any longer than needed to move your
vehicle in or out of the area. Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/ Seat Belts
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode. frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling con- Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision.
trols to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision
blower at high speed. if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn web-
bing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt or
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the
retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Air Bag Warning Light
WARNING!
The Air Bag Warning Light will turn on for four to eight
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition is first placed in An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or stacked 2
the ON/RUN position. If the light is either not on during floor mat, or damaged floor mat fasteners may cause
starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the your floor mat to interfere with the accelerator, brake,
system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as or clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To
possible. This light will illuminate with a single chime prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has been • ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat using the
detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light floor mat fasteners. DO NOT install your floor mat
comes on intermittently or remains on while driving, have upside down or turn your floor mat over. Lightly pull
an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately. Refer to confirm mat is secured using the floor mat fasten-
to “Occupant Restraints Systems” for further information. ers on a regular basis.
Defroster • ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR MAT
FROM THE VEHICLE before installing any other
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the floor mat. NEVER install or stack an additional floor
blower control on high speed. You should be able to feel the air mat on top of an existing floor mat.
directed against the windshield. See your authorized dealer • ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
for service if your defroster is inoperable. NEVER install a floor mat that cannot be properly
Floor Mat Safety Information attached and secured to your vehicle. If a floor mat
needs to be replaced, only use a FCA approved floor
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
mat for the specific make, model, and year of your
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
vehicle.
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or (Continued)
impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.

• ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the driver’s and check the floor mat fasteners are secure to the
side floor area. To check for interference, with the vehicle carpet. Fully depress each pedal to check for
vehicle properly parked with the engine off, fully interference with the accelerator, brake, or clutch
depress the accelerator, the brake, and the clutch pedals then re-install the floor mats.
pedal (if present) to check for interference. If your • It is recommended to only use mild soap and water
floor mat interferes with the operation of any pedal, to clean your floor mats. After cleaning, always check
or is not secure to the floor, remove the floor mat your floor mat has been properly installed and is
from the vehicle and place the floor mat in your secured to your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners
trunk. by lightly pulling mat.
• ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on the
passenger’s side floor area. Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
• ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide into The Vehicle
the driver’s side floor area when the vehicle is Tires
moving. Objects can become trapped under accelera-
tor, brake, or clutch pedals and could cause a loss of Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
vehicle control. patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
• NEVER place any objects under the floor mat (e.g., lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
towels, keys, etc.). These objects could change the and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
position of the floor mat and may cause interference Check the wheel bolts for tightness. Check the tires (includ-
with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals. ing spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
• If the vehicle carpet has been removed and re-
installed, always properly attach carpet to the floor
(Continued)
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn 2
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if
equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected. The cause
should be located and corrected immediately.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS 3
䡵 MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78 䡵 LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped . . . . . .78 ▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79 ▫ Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
▫ Manual Folding Door Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79 ▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . .92
▫ Manual Outside Mirror Adjustment — If ▫ High Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
▫ Power Outside Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . .80
▫ Parking Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
▫ Sun Visors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
䡵 SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
▫ Manual Seat Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
▫ Follow Me Home/Headlight Delay . . . . . . . . . . .93
▫ Folding Rear Seat — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .84
▫ Front Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
▫ Map/Dome/Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
▫ Cargo Vehicle Interior Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD . . . . . . . . . . .89
▫ Passenger Vehicle Interior Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . .95
76 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . . . .96 ▫ ParkSense Rear Park Assist System Usage
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
▫ Front Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . .96
䡵 PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
▫ Rear Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
䡵 TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN . . . . .98
䡵 POWER OUTLETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
䡵 SPEED CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
䡵 CIGAR LIGHTER AND ASH RECEIVER — IF
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
▫ To Set A Desired Speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 䡵 CUPHOLDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 䡵 STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 ▫ Glove Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 ▫ Dash Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102 ▫ Overhead Console Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
䡵 PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — 䡵 CARGO AREA FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
▫ Rear Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
▫ ParkSense Rear Park Assist Sensors . . . . . . . . . .103
▫ Rear Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
▫ ParkSense Rear Park Assist Alerts . . . . . . . . . . .103
▫ Cargo Compartment Light — If Equipped . . . . .115
▫ ParkSense Rear Park Assist Failure Indications . .104
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense Rear Park Assist
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 77
䡵 REAR WINDOW FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 䡵 ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .116
▫ Rear Window Defroster — If Equipped . . . . . . .115
3
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is a
twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the windshield.
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right
for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center
on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced
by moving the small control under the mirror to the night
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror should
be adjusted while the small control under the mirror is set
in the day position (toward the windshield). Adjusting Rearview Mirror
Outside Mirrors Manual Folding Door Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirrors to The door mirrors are hinged to allow the mirror to be
center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight overlap of folded rearward to help avoid damage.
the view obtained on the inside mirror.
3
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than
they really are. Relying too much on your passenger
side convex mirror could cause you to collide with
another vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror
when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in
the passenger side convex mirror. Some vehicles will
not have a convex passenger side mirror.
Folding Mirrors
CAUTION!
It is recommended to fold the mirrors into the full
rearward position to resist damage when entering a car
wash or a narrow location.
Manual Outside Mirror Adjustment — If Equipped you want the mirror to move. When you are finished
adjusting the mirror, turn the control to the center (neutral)
From the inside of the vehicle, use the control lever to
position to prevent accidental mirror movements.
adjust the mirror.
Power Mirror Controls

Manual Mirror Control Lever
Power Outside Mirrors — If Equipped 1 — Driver Mirror Select Position
2 — Neutral Position
The power mirror controls are located on the mirror flag 3 — Passenger Mirror Select Position
trim above the driver’s door trim panel. To adjust a mirror, 4 — Four-Way Mirror Control Switch
turn the control knob toward the left or right mirror
positions indicated. Tilt the control knob in the direction
Sun Visors SEATS
The driver and passenger sun visors are located on the Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
headliner, near the front windshield. The sun visor can be vehicle.
rotated downward or up against the door glass. Your
vehicle may be equipped with courtesy mirror located on WARNING! 3
the passenger sun visor.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
In a collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Sun Visor (Passenger Side Shown)

“Slide-On-Rod” Of Sun Visor
To use the “Slide-On-Rod” feature of the sun visor, rotate
the sun visor downward and swing it so it is parallel to the
side window. Then, slide the sun visor rearwards until it is
in the desired position.
Manual Seat Adjustments
The front driver and passenger seats can be adjusted
forward and rearward, and if equipped, may be reclined
and the height and lumbar can be adjusted.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts
and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or death Seat Adjustments
could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
1 — Forward/Rearward Adjustment Bar
2 — Height Adjustment Lever
3 — Recliner Knob
4 — Lumbar Knob
Forward And Rearward Adjustment

The adjustment bar is at the front of the seat, near the floor.
Pull the bar upward to move the seat forward or rearward.
Release the bar once the seat is in the desired position.
Then, using body pressure, move forward and rearward on
the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
Height Adjustment — If Equipped
WARNING!
The height adjustment lever is located on the center
outboard side of the seat. Lift up or push down on the front • Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
lever to adjust the front of the seat up or down. dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be 3
Recliner Adjustment — If Equipped adjusted properly and you could be injured. Adjust
The recliner knob is on the rear outboard side of the seat. To the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
recline the seatback, rotate the knob rearward without • Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
leaning back. To return the seatback to its normal upright shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
position, lean forward, rotate the knob forward until the In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and
seatback is in the upright position. be seriously or even fatally injured. Use the recliner
only when the vehicle is parked.
Lumbar Support — If Equipped
This feature allows you to increase or decrease the amount
of lumbar support. The lumbar control knob is located on
the rear upper outboard side of the seatback. Rotate the
control forward to increase and rearward to decrease the
desired amount of lumbar support.
Folding Rear Seat — If Equipped 3. Pull forward on the lower release lever located on the
lower outboard side of seat and lift the seat for extended
To provide additional storage area, each rear seat can be
folded flat to allow for extended cargo space. cargo space.
1. Locate the release lever (upper outboard side of seat),

and lift it upward until the seatback releases.
Seat Release Lever
Seatback Release Lever

2. Slowly fold down the seatback.
Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the front driver and passenger seats may
be equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions and
seatbacks. The controls for the front heated seats are
located on the lower outboard side of the seat. 3
Extended Cargo Space

4. Reverse order for original setting.
Heated Seat Control Button

Push the switch once to turn on the heated seats. The LED
on the switch illuminates when the heated seat is on. Push
the switch a second time to shut the heating elements off.
NOTE: Head Restraints
• This feature is only available with the ignition key in Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by
MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position. restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact.
• Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the
two to five minutes. head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
WARNING! WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin • All occupants, including the driver, should not oper-
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus- restraints are placed in their proper positions in
tion or other physical condition must exercise care order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even of a crash.
at low temperatures, especially if used for long • Head restraints should never be adjusted while the
periods of time. vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that restraints improperly adjusted or removed could
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. cause serious injury or death in the event of a
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in collision.
a seat that has been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface temperature of the
seat.
Front Head Restraints
To raise the head restraint, push the adjustment button,
located on the base of the head restraint, pull upward on
the head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the
adjustment button, located on the base of the head re- 3
straint, and push downward on the head restraint.
To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it can go then
push the release button and the adjustment button at the
base of each post while pulling the head restraint up. To
reinstall the head restraint, put the head restraint posts into
the holes and push downward. Then adjust the head
restraint to the appropriate height. Front Head Restraint
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
WARNING!
• A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could cause serious injury or death to
occupants of the vehicle. Always securely stow re-
moved head restraints in a location outside the
occupant compartment.
(Continued)
• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the
re-installation instructions above prior to operating
the vehicle or occupying a seat.
Rear Head Restraints

The outboard head restraints can be removed by pushing
the release buttons, located at the base of the head restraint
and pull upward on the whole assembly.
To reinstall the head restraint, put the head restraint posts
into the holes and push downward. Then adjust it to the Outboard Head Restraint Release Buttons
appropriate height. The center head restraint is adjustable and removable. To
raise the head restraint, push and hold the adjustment
WARNING! button, located on the base of the head restraint and pull
upward on the head restraint. To lower the head restraint,
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision or push and hold the adjustment button, and push downward
hard stop could cause serious injury or death to occu- on the head restraint till the desired height is reached.
pants of the vehicle. Always securely stow removed
head restraints in a location outside the occupant To remove the head restraint, push the release button and
compartment. adjustment button while pulling upward on the whole
assembly and raise it as far as it can go. To reinstall the
headrest, put the headrest posts into the holes while
pushing the release button and adjustment button. Then
adjust it to the appropriate height.
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released.
1. Pull the release lever located below the instrument panel
and in front of the driver’s door. 3
Center Head Restraint

1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
WARNING! Hood Release Lever

ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the
re-installation instructions above prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat.
2. Move to the outside of the vehicle, reach into the
opening beneath the center of the hood and push up the
safety latch lever to release it, before raising the hood.
Hood Prop Rod
WARNING!
Hood Safety Latch Lever Location Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
3. Raise the hood and place the hood prop rod in hood slot vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
to secure the hood in the open position. when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
CAUTION! injury or death.
Be sure to disengage the rod and secure it in close
position before closing the hood. Damage may occur.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower hood to approximately 12 inches (30 cm)
and drop the hood to close. Make sure hood is fully 3
closed for both latches. Never drive vehicle unless
hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.
LIGHTS
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever, located on the left side of the
steering wheel, controls the operation of the headlights, Multifunction Lever
high beams, parking lights, passing light and turn signals. Headlights
NOTE: The external lights can only be turned on with the
ignition in the ON/RUN position. Rotate the end of the multifunction lever upward
to the first detent for headlight operation.
NOTE: When the headlights are turned on, the Daytime

Running Lights, (if previously set through the menu) will
be deactivated.
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped Flash-To-Pass
To activate the Daytime Running Lights (DRL), rotate the You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
end of the multifunction lever to the O symbol. lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will turn on the high beams headlights until the lever is
NOTE:
released.
• The low beams and side/tail lights will not be on with
DRL. The DRL function may be programmed to be on or Parking Lights
off through the Uconnect system screen. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument To turn on the parking lights, remove the key or
Panel” for further information. turn the ignition to OFF/LOCK position and
• If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen radio, turn on the headlights.
this feature can be programmed through the instrument Turn Signals
cluster display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in- Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
formation. on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper
operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
High Beams
NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside
With the low beams activated, pull the multifunc- light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
tion lever towards the steering wheel to turn on the moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defec-
high beams. A high beam symbol will illuminate in the tive.
cluster to indicate the high beams are on. Pull the multi-
function lever a second time to switch the headlights back
to low beam.
Lane Change Assist Front Fog Lights — If Equipped
Tap the lever up or down once without moving beyond the
detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash five The fog light switch is located on the center stack
times. Then, turn off automatically. of the instrument panel, just below the radio.
Push the switch once to turn the front fog lights 3
Follow Me Home/Headlight Delay
on. Push the switch a second time to turn the front fog
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to have lights off.
the headlights remain on for a preset period of time.
Map/Dome/Lights
Activation
These lights are mounted between the sun visors on the
Remove the key or turn the ignition to the STOP (OFF/ overhead console. Each light is turned on by pushing the
LOCK) position, and pull the multifunction lever toward corresponding switch.
the steering wheel within two minutes. Each time the lever
Left Switch
is pulled, the activation of the lights will be extended by 30
seconds. The activation of the lights can be extended to a • Push the left switch to the left to turn off the auto dome
maximum of 210 seconds. lights. The dome lights will not automatically turn on
when a door is opened.
Deactivation
• Push the left switch to the right to turn on the dome
Pull the multifunction lever toward the steering wheel and lights.
hold it for more than two seconds.
Right Switch Cargo Vehicle Interior Lamps
• Push the right switch to the left to turn on the left map
light.
• Push the right switch to the right to turn on the right
map light.
Cargo Vehicle Interior Lamp Locations

1 — Lateral Roof Light
2 — Rear Roof Light
Map/Dome Lights
Lateral Roof Light
1 — Auto/Off 3 — Left Map
2 — Dome 4 — Right Map This is located on the right side of the load compartment.
Rear Roof Light
This is located on the rear panel of the load compartment.
In auto-mode the light comes on automatically when you Passenger Vehicle Interior Lamps
open the sliding doors and the rear wing doors and goes The interior lamps are located in the center of the roof,
out when you close them. above the second row seating and in the roof in the center
• Push the left-hand side of the lens to switch the light off of the rear load area.
when the doors are open. 3
• Push the right hand side of the lens to switch the light on
when the doors are open.
Passenger Vehicle Interior Lamp Locations

1 — Rear Roof Light
2 — Second Row Seating Light
Lateral Roof Light
Second Row Seating And Rear Roof Lights Operation
1 — Off
2 — Auto In auto-mode, the light comes on automatically when you
3 — On open the sliding doors and the rear wing doors and goes
out when you close them.
• Push the left-hand side of the lens to switch the light off WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
when the doors are open. The windshield wiper/washer lever is located on the right
• Push the right-hand side of the lens to switch the light side of the steering column.
on when the doors are open.
NOTE: The windshield wipers/washers will only operate
with the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
Front Windshield Wiper Operation
There are five different modes of operation for the front
windshield wipers. The windshield wiper lever can be
moved in several positions to access these modes.
Interior Light
1 — Off
2 — Auto
3 — On
Windshield Wiper Lever

Windshield Wiper Off the lever is released. When the lever is released, the wipers
will return to the off position and automatically shut off.
This is the normal position of the wiper lever. Front Windshield Washer Operation
Intermittent Speed Pull the windshield wiper/washer lever toward the steer- 3
ing wheel to activate the washers. The wipers will activate
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the first automatically for three cycles after the lever is released.
detent. The wipers will operate at intermittent
speed. When the vehicle’s speed increases, the time be- CAUTION!
tween the wipes will decrease.
• Turn the windshield wipers off when driving
Low Speed through an automatic car wash. Damage to the wind-
shield wipers may result if the wiper control is left in
any position other than off.
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the second
• In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch and
detent. The wipers will operate at low speed.
allow the wipers to return to the park position before
High Speed turning off the engine. If the wiper switch is left on
and the wipers freeze to the windshield, damage to
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the third the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is
detent. The wipers will operate at high speed. restarted.
• Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
Manual High Speed/Mist the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
Push the lever upward from the off position. The wipers off position. If the windshield wiper control is
will operate at high speed to clear off road mist or spray turned off and the blades cannot return to the off
from a passing vehicle. This operation will continue until position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Rear Window Wiper/Washer TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
Rear Windshield Wiper Operation This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward
or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the
Rotate the windshield wiper lever center ring upwards to
operate the rear window wiper as follows: steering column. The tilt/telescoping control handle is
located on the steering column, below the turn signal lever.
• In intermittent mode when the front window wiper is
not operating.
• In synchronous mode (at half the speed of the front
window wiper) when the front window wiper is oper-
ating.
• In continuous mode while vehicle is in REVERSE.
With the windshield wipers on, and REVERSE gear en-
gaged, rear window wiping will be continuous in the same
way.
Rear Windshield Washer Operation
Pushing the windshield wiper lever forward activates the
Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle
rear window washer. Keep the windshield wiper lever
pushed for more than quarter a second to activate the rear To unlock the steering column, push the control lever down-
window wiper as well. Releasing the windshield wiper ward. To tilt the steering column, move the steering wheel
lever will activate the smart washing function, as described upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten the
for the windshield wipers. steering column, pull the steering wheel outward or push it
inward as desired. To lock the steering column in position,
The function stops when the windshield wiper lever is pull the control lever up until fully engaged.
released.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-
ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause the 3
driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow
this warning may result in serious injury or death.
SPEED CONTROL
When engaged, the Speed Control takes over accelerator
operations at speeds greater than 25 mph (40 km/h).
The Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of Speed Control Buttons
the steering wheel. NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Speed
Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple
Speed Control functions are operated at the same time. If
this occurs, the Speed Control System can be reactivated by
pushing the on/off button and resetting the desired vehicle
set speed.
To Activate To Deactivate
Push the on/off button to activate the Speed Control. The A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC button or
Cruise Indicator Light in the instrument cluster display normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will
will illuminate. To turn the system off, push the on/off deactivate the Speed Control without erasing the set speed
button a second time. The Cruise Indicator Light will turn from memory.
off. The system should be turned off when not in use. Pushing the on/off button or turning the ignition to the
OFF position erases the set speed from memory.
WARNING!
To Resume Speed
Leaving the Speed Control system on when not in use
is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+) button
cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose and release. Resume can be used at any speed above
control and have an accident. Always leave the system 20 mph (32 km/h) up to the maximum speed of 100 mph
off when you are not using it. (160 km/h).
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Set A Desired Speed
To Increase Speed
Turn the Speed Control on. When the vehicle has reached
the desired speed greater than 25 mph, push the SET (-) When the Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by
button and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle pushing the RES (+) button.
will operate at the selected speed.
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
and on level ground before pushing the SET (-) button.
The speed increment is dependant on the chosen speed The speed decrement is dependant on the chosen speed
unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h): unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph) U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mph • Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph 3
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 mph. results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then the continue to decrease until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established. new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h) Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 km/h • Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 km/h. results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then the continue to decrease until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established. new set speed will be established.
To Decrease Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can decrease speed by
pushing the SET (-) button.
To Accelerate For Passing PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the The ParkSense system provides an audible indication of
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed. the distance between the rear fascia/bumper and a de-
tected obstacle when backing up, e.g. during a parking
Using Speed Control On Hills
maneuver. Refer to “ParkSense Rear Park Assist System
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the Usage Precautions” for limitations of this system and
vehicle set speed. recommendations.
NOTE: The Speed Control system maintains speed up and The ParkSense system is automatically activated when the
down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills is transmission is placed into REVERSE. As the distance from
normal. an obstacle behind the vehicle decreases, the audible alert
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur, it becomes more frequent.
may be preferable to drive without Speed Control. Interaction With Trailer Towing
The ParkSense system is automatically deactivated when a
WARNING!
trailer equipped by Mopar is hitched to the vehicle. The
Speed Control can be dangerous where the system system will be automatically activated as soon as the trailer
cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could is removed. If it does not happen, turning the key ignition
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose switch to OFF and then to ON again would be needed. In
control and have an accident. Do not use Speed Control case of a non Mopar trailer hitches are mounted the sensor
in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy, deactivation cannot be guaranteed.
snow-covered or slippery.
ParkSense Rear Park Assist Sensors The minimum height of a detectable obstacle corresponds
to the maximum height of an obstacle that would clear the
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within underside of the vehicle during the parking maneuver.
the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles, ParkSense Rear Park Assist Alerts
in the horizontal direction, from approximately 12 inches 3
If an obstacle is behind the vehicle when REVERSE gear is
(30 cm) up to 55 inches (140 cm) from the center of the rear
engaged, an audible alert is activated.
fascia/bumper and up to 24 inches (60 cm) from the
corners of the rear fascia/bumper, depending on the loca- The tones emitted by the loudspeaker inform the driver
tion, type and orientation of the obstacle. that the vehicle is approaching an obstacle. The pauses
between the tones are directly proportional to the distance
from the obstacle. Pulses emitted in quick succession
indicate the presence of a very close obstacle. A continuous
tone indicates that the obstacle is less than 12 inches
(30 cm) away.
ParkSense Rear Park Assist Sensors Location

If several obstacles are detected, the ParkSense system
indicates the nearest obstacle.
Audible And Visual Signals Supplied By The Park Assist System
SIGNAL MEANING INDICATION
Obstacle Distance An obstacle is present Audible signal (dashboard loudspeaker)
within the sensors’ field of • Sound pulses emitted at a rate that increases as the dis-
view tance decreases.
• Emits continuous tone at 12 inches (30 cm).
• Adjustable volume level programmable through per-
sonal settings in the instrument cluster display. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel”.
Failure Sensor or system failures Visual Signal (instrument panel)
• Icon appears on display.
• Message is displayed on instrument cluster display
(if equipped).
While audible signals are emitted, the audio system is not ParkSense Rear Park Assist Failure Indications
muted. A malfunction of the ParkSense sensors or system is
The audible signal is turned off immediately if the distance indicated, during REVERSE gear engagement, by the in-
increases. The tone cycle remains constant if the distance strument panel warning icon.
measured by the inner sensors is constant. If this condition The warning icon is illuminated and a message is
occurs for the external sensors, the signal is turned off after displayed on the instrument cluster display (if
three seconds (stopping warnings during maneuvers par- equipped). Refer to “Warning And Indicator
allel to walls). Lights” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
The sensors and wiring are tested continuously when the ParkSense Rear Park Assist System Usage
ignition is in the ON/RUN position. Failures are indicated Precautions
immediately if they occur when the system is on.
NOTE:
Even if the system is able to identify that a specific sensor • Ensure that the outer surface and the underside of the
is in failure condition, the instrument cluster display shall 3
rear bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or
indicate that the ParkSense system is unavailable, without other obstruction to keep the ParkSense Rear Park Assist
reference to the sensor in failure condition. If even a single system operating properly.
sensor fails, the entire system must be disabled. The system
is turned off automatically. • Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of the ParkSense system.
Cleaning The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System
• Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not to
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap and scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be
a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. In washing covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
stations, clean sensors quickly keeping the vapor jet/high Failure to do so can result in the system not working
pressure washing nozzles at least 4 inches (10 cm) from the properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an
sensors. Do not scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide a
could damage the sensors. false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/
bumper.
• Objects such as bicycle carriers, etc., must not be placed
within 12 inches (30 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper
while driving the vehicle. Failure to do so can result in
the system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor
problem, causing a failure indication to be displayed in
the instrument cluster display.
WARNING! CAUTION!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even when • ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
using ParkSense. Always check carefully behind recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the
and blind spots before backing up. You are respon- sensors will not be detected when they are in close
sible for safety and must continue to pay attention to proximity.
your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in • The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
serious injury or death. ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an
• Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is ParkSense.
not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in
injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the If it’s necessary to keep the ball mount and hitch ball
hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the assembly mounted for a long period, it is possible to filter
rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the con- out the ball mount and hitch ball assembly presence in
tinuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball sensor field of view. The filtering operation must be
mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size performed only by an authorized dealer.
and shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle
is behind the vehicle.
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF When the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE, and
EQUIPPED Camera Delay is activated in the menu screen, the camera
image will continue to be displayed for up to 10 seconds,
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen image unless the speed of the vehicle is greater than 8 mph
(13 km/h), the transmission is in PARK, or the ignition key 3
of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the gear
is in the OFF position.
selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be displayed
on the touchscreen display along with a caution note to The display of the camera image can be enabled or
“check entire surroundings” across the top of the screen. disabled through the rear camera setting menu item (Cam-
After five seconds this note will disappear. The ParkView era on/off).
camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear
When displayed, static grid lines will illustrate the width of
license plate.
the vehicle and will show separate zones that will help
The Camera Delay setting can be set to on/off on the rear indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle. The follow-
camera settings menu. When the vehicle is shifted out of ing table shows the approximate distances for each zone:
REVERSE and the Camera Delay is turned off, the rear
camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen
appears on display again.
Zone Distance to the rear of the vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)
Green 3 ft or greater (1 m or greater)
POWER OUTLETS
WARNING!
Passenger Compartment Power Outlets
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always The cigar lighter and the power socket are located in the
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to center console, and both operate with the ignition key in
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstruc- the MAR (ON/RUN) position.
tions, or blind spots before backing up. You are re-
sponsible for the safety of your surroundings and must
continue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to
do so can result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be
used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive
path.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven
slowly when using ParkView to be able to stop in Passenger Compartment Power Outlets
time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended Load Compartment Power Outlet
that the driver look frequently over his/her shoulder
when using ParkView. The Load Compartment Power Outlet is located on the left
side of the rear cargo compartment. It operates with the
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds ignition key in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position. The
up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and outlet can be used for powering 12 Volt adaptive accesso-
dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens. ries and recharging communications devices.
Load Compartment Power Outlet Underhood Power Outlet Fuse Locations
CAUTION! 1 — #85 Fuse 15A Blue Rear Power Outlet 12V

2 — #86 Fuse 15A Blue IP Power Outlet 12V
Do not connect devices with power higher than 180W 3 — #30 Fuse 15A Blue 2nd IP Power Outlet 12V
to the outlet. Using unsuitable adaptors may damage
the outlet. WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
(Continued)
CIGAR LIGHTER AND ASH RECEIVER — IF
EQUIPPED
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle. A removable ash receiver and cigar lighter are available.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric Push the cigar lighter button to activate the cigar lighter
shock and failure. when the ignition key is in the MAR (ON/RUN) position.
After a few seconds the button returns to its initial position
CAUTION! and the cigar lighter is ready for use.
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power NOTE: Always check that the cigar lighter has turned itself
from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e., off.
cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long
enough, the vehicle’s battery will discharge suffi- WARNING!
ciently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the
engine from starting. The cigar lighter becomes very hot. Handle it carefully
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers, and make sure children don’t touch it: risk of fire
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery and/or burning.
even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and
with greater caution. CUPHOLDERS
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or long A cupholder is located in the front and rear of the center
periods of the vehicle not being started (with acces- console.
sories still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a
sufficient length of time to allow the generator to
recharge the vehicle’s battery.
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the passenger side of
the instrument panel. 3
To open the glove compartment, pull the release handle.
NOTE: The glove compartment handle is equipped with a
lock. To lock the glove compartment, remove the emer-
gency key from the key fob, insert emergency key into
glove compartment handle lock cylinder and turn the key
to the lock position and remove the key. Use the reverse
sequence to unlock the glove compartment. Glove Compartment Release Handle
Dash Storage Overhead Console Storage
The dash storage is located on the right side of the There is additional shelf storage above the front sun visors.
instrument panel above the glove compartment.
Overhead Console Storage Location

Dash Storage
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Rear Cargo Tie-Downs
To make it easier to secure your load, there are hooks (if
equipped) fixed to the floor. 3
Rear Cargo Tie-Downs (Passenger Version)

NOTE: Power washing is not allowed inside the cargo
area.
WARNING!
Rear Cargo Tie-Downs (Cargo Version)
• To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear
cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes
only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats and
use seat belts.
(Continued)
Rear Cargo Light
In auto-mode the light comes on automatically when you
• Cargo tie-down hooks are not safe anchors for a child
open the sliding doors and the rear wing doors and goes
seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or accident, a hook
out when you close them.
could pull loose and allow the child seat to come
• Push the left-hand side of the lens to switch the light off
loose. A child could be badly injured. Use only the
when the doors are open.
anchors provided for child seat tethers.
The weight and position of cargo and passengers can • Push the right hand side of the lens to switch the light on
change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle han- when the doors are open.
dling. To avoid loss of control resulting in personal
injury, follow these guidelines for loading your ve-
hicle:
• Do not carry loads which exceed the load limits
described on the label attached to the left door or left
door center pillar.
• Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible.
• Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight
over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of the
vehicle to sway.
• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of Interior Light
the seatback. This could impair visibility or become
1 — Off
a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or accident. 2 — Auto
3 — On
Cargo Compartment Light — If Equipped the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator in
the button will illuminate when the rear window defroster
The cargo compartment light comes on automatically
is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off
when the swing doors are opened and turns off when the
after approximately 20 minutes. To manually shut the
doors are closed.
defroster off, push the button a second time. 3
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
window defroster only when the engine is operating.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear win-
dow. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the
interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a
mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heat-
ing elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking
Cargo Compartment Light
with warm water.
REAR WINDOW FEATURES • Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
Rear Window Defroster — If Equipped window cleaners on the interior surface of the win-
dow.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
The rear window defroster button is located in the
center of the instrument panel, below the radio.
Push this button to turn on the rear window defroster and
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED NOTE:
The crossbars and siderails are designed to carry the • To help control wind noise when the crossbars are not in
weight on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack. The load use, place the front and rear crossbars approximately
must not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and should be uniformly 24 inches (61 cm) apart. Optimal noise reduction can
distributed over the luggage rack crossbars. then be achieved by adjusting the front crossbar forward
or aft using increments of 1 inch (2.5 cm).
NOTE: If not equipped with crossbars, your authorized
dealer can order and install Mopar crossbars built specifi- • If (or any metallic object) is placed over the satellite
cally for this roof rack system. radio antenna (if equipped), you may experience inter-
ruption of satellite radio reception. For improved satel-
Distribute cargo weight evenly on the roof rack crossbars. lite radio reception, avoid placing the rear crossbar over
The roof rack does not increase the total load carrying the satellite radio antenna.
capacity of the vehicle. Be sure the total load of cargo inside
the vehicle plus that on the external rack does not exceed WARNING!
the maximum vehicle load capacity.
Cargo must be securely tied before driving your ve-
To move the crossbars, loosen the attachments, located at
hicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the vehicle,
the upper edge of each crossbar, approximately eight turns
particularly at high speeds, resulting in personal injury
using the anti-theft wrench provided with the Mopar
or property damage. Follow the roof rack cautions
crossbars. Then, move the crossbar to the desired position,
when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
keeping the crossbars parallel to the rack frame. Once the
crossbar is in the desired position, retighten the with the
wrench to lock the crossbar into position.
CAUTION!
• To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle, do not
carry any loads on the roof rack without the crossbars
installed. The load should be secured and placed on 3
top of the crossbars, not directly on the roof. If it is
necessary to place the load on the roof, place a
blanket or some other protection between the load
and the roof surface.
• To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do not
exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of 150 lb
(68 kg). Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as
possible and secure the load appropriately.
• Long loads which extend over the windshield, such
as wood panels or surfboards, or loads with large
frontal area should be secured to both the front and
rear of the vehicle.
• Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully
when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack.
Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby truck
traffic, can add sudden upward lift to a load. This is
especially true on large flat loads and may result in
damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . .121 ▫ Buttons On The Faceplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
4
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122 ▫ Buttons On The Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
▫ Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122 ▫ Customer Programmable Features —
5.0 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . .124
䡵 UCONNECT RADIOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
▫ Instrument Cluster Display Location And
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124 䡵 IPOD/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . . .164
▫ Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items . . . . . . .126 䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
䡵 WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS . . . . . . . .133
▫ Radio Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
▫ Red Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . . .166
▫ Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
▫ Green Telltale Indicator Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
▫ Blue Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
▫ Manual Climate Control Overview. . . . . . . . . . .166
䡵 CYBERSECURITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
䡵 UCONNECT SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
120 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
䡵 UCONNECT 5.0 VOICE RECOGNITION ▫ Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
QUICK TIPS — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
▫ Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
▫ Introducing Uconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
▫ Voice Text Reply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
▫ Get Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
▫ Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
▫ Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
▫ Basic Voice Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 121
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1 — Air Outlet 7 — Upper Dash Storage 13 — Climate Controls

2 — Multifunction Lever (External Lights) 8 — Radio 14 — USB Charger/AUX
3 — Instrument Cluster 9 — Passenger Air Bag 15 — Driver Air Bag
4— Horn 10 — Lower Dash Storage 16 — Uconnect Phone Buttons
5— Electronic Speed Control Switches 11 — Glove Compartment 17 — Gear Selector
6— Multifunction Lever (Front/Rear Wiper, 12 — Switch Bank
Trip Computer)
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Instrument Cluster
Instrument Cluster 2. Fuel Gauge
1. Speedometer • The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.
• Indicates vehicle speed.
• The fuel pump arrow symbol points to the side
of the vehicle where the fuel door is located.
3. Temperature Gauge
CAUTION!
• The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tem-
perature. Any reading within the normal range indi- Driving with a hot engine cooling system could dam-
cates that the engine cooling system is operating age your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,”
satisfactorily. pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the
• The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tem- air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back
into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the 4
perature when driving in hot weather or up mountain
grades. It should not be allowed to exceed the upper “H,” turn the engine off immediately and call an
limits of the normal operating range. authorized dealer for service.
WARNING! 4. Tachometer
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or • Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling (RPM x 1000).
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer for
5. Instrument Cluster Display
service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to look
under the hood yourself, see “Servicing And Mainte- • When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
nance.” Follow the warnings under the Cooling System shows the instrument cluster display messages. Refer
Pressure Cap paragraph. to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Your vehicle may be equipped with an instrument cluster
display, which offers useful information to the driver. With
the ignition in the STOP/OFF position, opening/closing of
a door will activate the display for viewing, and display
the total miles (kilometers) in the odometer. Your instru-
ment cluster display is designed to display important
information about your vehicle’s systems and features.
Using a driver interactive display located on the instru-
ment panel, your instrument cluster display can show you
how systems are working and give you warnings when
they aren’t. The steering wheel mounted controls allow
you to scroll through and enter the main menus and Instrument Cluster Display Location
submenus. You can access the specific information you The instrument cluster display menu may consist of the
want and make selections and adjustments. following items depending on the configuration of vehicle
options:
Instrument Cluster Display Location And Controls
• Speed Beep
The instrument cluster display features a driver-interactive
display that is located in the instrument cluster. • Trip B Data
• Set Time
• Set Date
• Autoclose
• Units
• Language • MENU Button
• Buzzer Volume Push and release the MENU button for a time longer than
• Seat Belt Buzzer 1 second to access/select the information screens or sub-
menu screens of a main menu item. Push and hold the
• Service MENU button for two seconds to reset displayed/selected
• Daylights features that can be reset. 4
• Exit Menu • UP Arrow Button
The system allows the driver to select information by Push and release the up arrow button to scroll upward
pushing the following buttons mounted on the instrument through the main menu and submenus.
panel to the right of the steering column: • DOWN Arrow Button
Push and release the down arrow button to scroll down-
ward through the main menu and submenus.
Dimmer:
With headlights on and without entering in the menu, push
the up or down arrow button to increase or decrease the
brightness of the instrument panel, graphics and command
buttons.
Selecting An Option Of The Main Menu With Submenu:
1. Briefly push and release the MENU button to display
the first submenu option.
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
2. Push and release the up or down arrow button (by 2. If the function is on, push and release the up or down
single pushes) to scroll through all the submenu options. arrow button to select the required speed limit and then
push MENU to confirm.
3. Briefly push and release the MENU button to select the
displayed submenu option and to open the relevant NOTE: The speed may be set in the range from 20 to
setup menu. 125 MPH (30 to 200 km/h) according to the previously
chosen unit.
4. Push and release the up or down arrow button (by
single pushes) to select the new setting for this submenu The setting will increase/decrease by five units each time
option. the up or down arrow button is pushed. Hold down the up
or down arrow button to automatically increase/decrease
5. Briefly push and release the MENU button to store the
the setting rapidly. Complete the adjustment when you
new setting and go back to the previously selected
approach the desired value.
submenu option.
Push the MENU button briefly to return to the menu
6. Push and hold the MENU button to return to the main
screen or hold the MENU button down to return to the
menu (short hold) or the main screen (longer hold).
standard screen without storing.
Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items
To cancel the setting:
Speed Beep
1. Briefly push the MENU button. “ON” will flash in the
This function is used to set a speed limit (MPH or km/h); display.
the driver is alerted when this limit is exceeded.
2. Push the down arrow button. “OFF” will flash in the
To set the desired speed limit: display
1. Push the MENU button briefly. The display will show 3. Push the MENU button briefly to return to the menu
the wording (SPEED) and the unit (MPH) or (km/h) screen or hold the MENU button down to return to the
previously set. standard screen without storing.
Trip B Data 3. Select the required option and then push MENU.
This function can be used to activate (On) or deactivate 4. If selecting the “Time” submenu, briefly push MENU,
(Off) the Trip B display (Partial Trip). the “hours” will flash on the display.
Refer to ⬙Trip Computer⬙ in this section for further infor- 5. Push and release the up or down arrow button to adjust.
mation.
6. Push the MENU button; the “minutes” will flash on the 4
To switch the function On/Off: display.
1. Push the MENU button briefly. The display will flash 7. Push and release the up or down arrow button to adjust.
On or Off according to the previous setting.
8. Push the MENU button briefly to return to the menu
2. Push and release the up or down arrow button to select. screen or hold the MENU button down to return to the
standard screen without storing.
Push the MENU button briefly to return to the menu
screen or hold the MENU button down to return to the The setting will increase or decrease by one unit each time the
standard screen without storing. up or down arrow button is pushed. Hold down the button to
increase/decrease the setting rapidly and automatically. Com-
Set Time
plete the adjustment when you approach the desired value.
With this function, it is possible to set the time through two
When you select “Mode”, pushing the MENU button
submenus: ⬙Time⬙ and ⬙Mode⬙.
makes the mode flash on the display.
To set the time:
1. Push up or down arrow button to select ⬙24h⬙ or ⬙12h⬙.
1. Push the MENU button; the display will show the two
2. When you have made the required settings, push the
submenus “Time” and “Mode”.
MENU button briefly to go back to the submenu screen
2. Push and release the up or down arrow button to switch or hold the button down to go back to the main menu
between the two submenus. screen without saving.
3. Hold the MENU button down again to return to the Push the MENU button briefly to return to the menu
standard screen or to the main menu according to where screen or hold the MENU button down to return to the
you are in the menu. standard screen without storing.
Set Date Autoclose
With this function, it is possible to set the date. When activated (On), this function locks the doors auto-
matically when the vehicle speed exceeds 12 mph
To adjust the date:
(20 km/h).
1. Push the MENU button; the “year” will flash on the
To activate or deactivate this function:
display.
1. Push the MENU button briefly to display a submenu.
2. Push and release the up or down arrow button to adjust.
2. Push the MENU button briefly to make the display flash
3. Push the MENU button; the “month” will flash on the
On or Off according to the previous setting
display.
3. Push the up or down arrow button to select.
4. Push the MENU button briefly to return to the submenu
5. Push the MENU button; the “day” will flash on the
screen or hold the button down to return to the main
display.
menu screen without saving.
5. Hold the MENU button down again to return to the
The setting will increase or decrease by one unit each time standard screen or to the main menu according to where
the up or down arrow button is pushed. Hold down the up you are in the menu.
or down arrow button to increase/decrease the setting
rapidly and automatically. Complete the adjustment when
you approach the desired value.
Setting The Units When you select the ⬙Temperature⬙ submenu: briefly push-
ing the MENU button the display will show ⬙°C⬙ or ⬙°F⬙
With this function, it is possible to set the unit of measure-
ment in three submenus: “Distance”, “Consumption” and depending on the previous setting.
“Temperature”. 1. Push and release the up or down arrow button to select.
To set the required unit of measurement: 2. When you have made the required settings, push the
MENU button briefly to go back to the submenu screen 4
1. Push the MENU button to display the three submenus.
or hold the MENU button down to go back to the main
2. Push and release the up or down arrow button to menu screen without saving.
navigate through the three submenus.
3. Hold the MENU button down again to return to the
3. Select the required option and then push the MENU standard screen or to the main menu according to where
button. you are in the menu.
4. If selecting the ⬙Distance⬙ submenu, briefly push the Language
MENU button and the display will show “mi” or ⬙km⬙
Display messages can be shown in different languages. To
depending on the previous setting.
set the desired language, proceed as follows:
5. Push and release the up or down arrow button to select.
1. Push the MENU button, the previously set language
When you select the “Consumption” submenu: briefly will flash on the display.
pushing the MENU button makes “mpg” or “km/l” ap-
pear on the display, depending on the previous setting.
3. Push the MENU button to return to the menu screen or
1. If the set distance unit of measurement is ⬙mi⬙ (km) the
hold the MENU button down to return to the standard
fuel consumption unit will be displayed in ⬙mpg⬙ (km/l
screen without storing.
or l/100 km).
Buzzer Volume NOTE: The “Scheduled Servicing Plan” includes vehicle
maintenance at fixed intervals. Refer to “Maintenance
With this function, the volume of the acoustic signal which
Schedules” for further information.
accompanies the display of failure/warning can be ad-
justed according to 8 levels. Exit Menu
To set the desired volume: This is the last function that closes the cycle of settings
listed in the menu screen.
1. Push the MENU button, the previously set volume level
will flash on the display. 1. Pushing the MENU button briefly will return the dis-
play to the standard screen without storing.
2. Push the down arrow button to return to the first menu
3. Push the MENU button to return to the menu screen or
item on the display.
hold the MENU button down to return to the standard
screen without storing. Change Engine Oil Indicator System
Service Change Engine Oil
Using this function you can display information about the Your vehicle may be equipped with an engine oil change
mileage intervals for vehicle servicing. indicator system. The “Change Engine Oil” message will
display in the instrument cluster display. The engine oil
To consult the information:
change indicator system is duty cycle based, which means
1. Push the MENU button, which makes the display show the engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent
the service interval in mi or km according to the upon your personal driving style.
previous setting.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
2. Push the MENU button to go back to the menu screen or time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
hold the MENU button down to go back to the standard To turn off the message temporarily, push and release the
screen.
MENU button. To reset the oil change indicator system Trip Button
(after performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to the The TRIP button, located on the right steering column
following procedure. stalk, can be used to display and to reset the previously
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (do not start described values.
the engine). • A short button push displays the different values.
4
2. Fully push the accelerator pedal slowly, three times, • A long button push resets the system and then starts a
within 10 seconds. new trip.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position. Trip Functions
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you Both trip functions are resettable (reset — start of new trip).
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
“Trip A” can be used to display the figures relating to:
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
• Range
Trip Computer
• Trip distance A
The Trip Computer is located in the instrument cluster. It
features a driver-interactive display (displays information • Average Economy A
such as trip information, range, fuel consumption, average • Instantaneous Economy
speed, and travel time).
• Average speed A
• Travel time A (driving time)
• Reset Trip A
“Trip B” can be used to display the figures relating to: NOTE: The range depends on several factors: driving
• Trip distance B style, type of route (freeway, residential, mountain roads,
etc.), and conditions of use of the vehicle (load, tire
• Average Economy B pressure, etc.). Trip planning must take into account the
• Average speed B above notes.
• Travel time B (driving time) Distance Traveled
• Reset Trip B This value shows the distance covered since the last reset.
NOTE: “Trip B” functions may be excluded (see “Trip B Average Fuel Economy
Data”). “Range” and “Instantaneous Economy” cannot be This value shows the approximate average fuel consump-
reset. “Reset Trip A” and “Reset Trip B” may be present. tion since the last reset.
Values Displayed Instantaneous Fuel Economy
Range This indicates the fuel consumption. The value is con-
This indicates the distance which may be traveled with the stantly updated. The message “----” will appear on the
fuel remaining in the tank, assuming that driving condi- display if the vehicle is parked with the engine running.
tions will not change. The message “----” will appear on the Average Speed
display in the following cases:
This value shows the vehicle’s average speed as a function
• Distance less than 30 miles (or 50 km). of the overall time elapsed since the last reset.
• The vehicle is parked for a long time with the engine
Travel Time
running.
This value shows the time elapsed since the last reset.
WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS All active telltales will display first if applicable. The
system check menu may appear different based upon
The warning/indicator lights switch on in the instrument
panel together with a dedicated message and/or acoustic equipment options and current vehicle status. Some tell-
signal when applicable. These indications are indicative tales are optional and may not appear.
and precautionary and as such must not be considered as
exhaustive and/or alternative to the information contained 4
in the Owner’s Manual, which you are advised to read
carefully in all cases. Always refer to the information in this
chapter in the event of a failure indication.
Red Telltale Indicator Lights
Engine Oil Level Warning Light
Red Telltale
What It Means
Light
Engine Oil Level Warning Light
This warning light appears on the panel when the engine oil level falls below the minimum rec-
ommended value. Restore the correct engine oil level or contact your authorized dealer for ser-
vice.
Engine Temperature Warning Light
Red Warning
What It Means
Light
Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condition. As engine coolant temperatures rise and the
gauge approaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reaching a
set threshold. Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H, a continuous
chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool or the 4 minutes duration is expired, which-
ever come first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on,
turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature
reading does not return to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for service. Refer to
“If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Red Telltale
What It Means
Light
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a prob- 4
lem is detected while the engine is running, the light will either stay on or flash depending on
the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle is safely and completely
stopped and the transmission is placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off. If the
light remains on with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an
authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
If the light continues to flash when the engine is running, immediate service is required and you
may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your vehicle
may require towing. The light will come on when the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN and
remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Red Telltale
What It Means
Light
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
When the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN position, if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a
chime will sound and the light will turn on. When driving, if the driver or front passenger seat
belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously and a
chime will sound. Refer to “Occupant Restraints Systems” in “Things To Know Before Starting
Your Vehicle” for further information.
Red Telltale
What It Means
Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN position. If the light is either not on during startup, stays on, or turns on while driv-
ing, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This light will illumi-
nate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has been detected, it will
stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving,
have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately.
Oil Pressure Warning Light
Red Telltale
What It Means
Light
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle 4
and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not indicate how much oil
is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
Battery Charge Warning Light
Red Telltale What It Means

Light
Battery Charge Warning Light
This light illuminates when the battery is not charging properly. If it stays on while the engine is
running, there may be a malfunction with the charging system. Contact your authorized dealer as
soon as possible. This indicates a possible problem with the electrical system or a related compo-
nent.
Door Open Indicator Light
Red Telltale
What It Means
Light
Door Open Indicator Light
This indicator will illuminate when one or more door(s) are not fully closed.
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving and a door is opened, there will also be a single chime.
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
Red Telltale
What It Means
Light
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
This light indicates that the transmission fluid temperature is running hot. This may occur with
severe usage. If this light turns on, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. Then, place the trans-
mission into NEUTRAL and run the engine at idle speed or apply light foot pressure to increase
the engine speed RPM until the Transmission Temperature light turns off.
WARNING! CAUTION!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the Trans- Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera-
mission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
could cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact with severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire.
Transmission Fault Warning Light
Red Telltale
What It Means
Light
Transmission Fault Warning Light
This light will illuminate (together with a message in the Instrument Cluster Display and a 4
buzzer) to indicate a transmission fault. Contact your authorized dealer if the message remains
after restarting the engine.
Brake Warning Light
Red Telltale What It Means

Light
Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake appli-
cation. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that the brake
fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the
full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunc-
tion or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will remain on until the
condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the Brake Booster, the ABS pump will
run when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
NOTE: Brake Warning Light may illuminate due to excessive wear to brake pads.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is (EBD).
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has CAUTION!
dropped below a specified level.
In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected. Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immedi-
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp ate repair to the ABS system is required.
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
The vehicle should have service performed, and the brake
placing the ignition in the ON/RUN position. The light
fluid level checked.
should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary. should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or
a brake fault is detected. If the light does not illuminate,
WARNING! have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It applied with the ignition placed in the ON/RUN position.
will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately. applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
What It Means
Light
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
After the ignition is turned on, the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) light illuminates to indicate 4
function check at vehicle startup. If the light remains on after startup or comes on and stays on at
road speeds, it may indicate that the ABS has detected a malfunction or has become inoperative.
The system reverts to standard non-anti-lock brakes.
If both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Warning Light are on, see an authorized dealer im-
mediately. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control System” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information.
Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights
Low Fuel Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
What It Means
Light
Low Fuel Indicator Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 2–6 gal (9–11 L) this light will turn on, and remain on
until fuel is added.
Generic Warning Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
What It Means
Light
Generic Warning Indicator Light
The Generic Warning Light will illuminate if any of the following conditions occur: Engine Oil
Pressure Sensor Failure, External Light Failure, Parking Sensor Failure, DST System Failure, Air
Bag Warning Light Fault (in this last case the Generic Warning Light will flash. If it happens,
have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately).
Fuel Cutoff Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
What It Means
Light
Fuel Cutoff Indicator Light
This telltale will illuminate after an accident has occurred, and the system has shut the fuel off.
Glow Plug Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
What It Means
Light
Glow Plug Indicator Light
To prevent possible engine damage while starting at low temperatures, this vehicle will inhibit 4
engine cranking and this icon will blink when the ambient temperature is less than -31° F
(-35° C) and the oil temperature sensor reading indicates an engine block heater has not been
used. The message “plug in engine heater” will be displayed in the instrument cluster when the
ambient temperature is below -25.6° F (-32° C) at the time the engine is shut off as a reminder.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light
Yellow Telltale
What It Means
Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure is
lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these cases,
optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above, the display will show the indica-
tions corresponding to each tire in sequence.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
CAUTION!
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to main-
Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as tain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not
handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle, reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low
avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a tire puncture tire pressure telltale.
occurs, repair immediately using the dedicated tire
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunc-
repair kit and contact your authorized dealer as soon as
tion indicator to indicate when the system is not operating
possible.
properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects
monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one
recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups
of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction
or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels
with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illumi-
on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning
nates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your
properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels
your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper
allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
CAUTION! CAUTION! (Continued)

The TPMS has been optimized for the original equip- Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using
ment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure
have been established for the tire size equipped on Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoper-
your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor able. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is
damage may result when using replacement equip- recommended that you take your vehicle to your au- 4
ment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. thorized dealer to have your sensor function checked.
(Continued)
Vehicle Security Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
What It Means
Light
Vehicle Security Indicator Light
If during starting, the key code is not correctly recognized, the vehicle security light comes on in
the instrument panel. In this case, turn the key to OFF and then to ON/RUN; if it is still locked,
try again with the other keys that come with the vehicle. Contact an authorized dealer if you still
cannot start the engine.
If with the engine running, the warning light comes on, this means that the system is running a
self-test (for example for a voltage drop).
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
Yellow Telltale
What It Means
Light
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic System
called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. The light will
illuminate when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If the bulb does not
come on when turning the key from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the
light after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several typical
driving styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert serious conditions that could lead to im-
mediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced as
soon as possible if this occurs.
WARNING! CAUTION!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the vehicle
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in death converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others. Immediate service is required.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
What It Means
Light
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light — If Equipped
The “ESC Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN position, and when ESC is activated. It should go out with the engine running. If 4
the “ESC Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has
been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the ve-
hicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see
your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Indicator Light” come on momentarily each
time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
• Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on, even if it was turned
off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive.
• This light will come on when the vehicle is in an ESC event.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
What It Means
Light
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
Green Telltale Indicator Lights

Turn Signal Indicator Lights
Green Telltale
What It Means
Light
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
The instrument cluster directional arrow will flash independently for the left or right turn signal
as selected, as well as the exterior turn signal lamp(s) (front and rear) as selected when the multi-
function lever is moved down (left) or up (right).
NOTE:
• A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either
turn signal on.
• Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
Green Telltale
What It Means
Light
Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on. 4
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
What It Means
Light
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on.
Cruise Control Engaged Indicator Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
What It Means
Light
Cruise Control Engaged Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the cruise control has been set to a certain speed.
Blue Telltale Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
Blue Telltale
What It Means
Light
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on. Push the multifunction control lever
away from you to switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the lever toward you to switch the
headlights back to low beam. Pull the lever toward you for a temporary high beam on, ⬙flash to
pass⬙ scenario.
CYBERSECURITY and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers, evaluates
and takes appropriate steps as needed. Similar to a com-
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be
equipped with both wired and wireless networks. These puter or other devices, your vehicle may require software
updates to improve the usability and performance of your
networks allow your vehicle to send and receive informa-
tion. This information allows systems and features in your systems or to reduce the potential risk of unauthorized and
unlawful access to your vehicle systems.
vehicle to function properly.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security fea-
vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent
tures to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful
version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is
access to vehicle systems and wireless communications.
installed.
Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over time
NOTE:
WARNING!
• FCA or your dealer may contact you directly regarding
• It is not possible to know or to predict all of the software updates.
possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are
breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems, • To help further improve vehicle security and minimize
including safety related systems, could be impaired the potential risk of a security breach, vehicle owners
or a loss of vehicle control could occur that may should: 4
result in an accident involving serious injury or • Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com/software-
death. update to learn about available Uconnect software
• ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or CD) into updates.
your vehicle if it came from a trusted source. Media • Only connect and use trusted media devices (e.g.
of unknown origin could possibly contain malicious personal mobile phones, USBs, CDs).
software, and if installed in your vehicle, it may
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications cannot
increase the possibility for vehicle systems to be
be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept infor-
breached.
mation and private communications without your consent.
• As always, if you experience unusual vehicle behav-
For further information, refer to “Onboard Diagnostic
ior, take your vehicle to your nearest authorized
System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in “Maintaining Your
dealer immediately.
Vehicle”.
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on the
touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on the
center of the instrument panel that allows you to access
and change the customer programmable features. Many
features can vary by vehicle.
CAUTION!
Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen, doing so
can result in damage to the touchscreen.
Uconnect 5.0 Buttons On The Touchscreen And Buttons

On The Faceplate
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
Your Uconnect system may also have a power and back
buttons on the faceplate.
Push the power button on the faceplate to turn off the
Uconnect screen. Push the power button on the faceplate a
second time to turn the screen on.
Push the back button on the faceplate to exit out of a menu 4
or certain option on the Uconnect system.
Buttons On The Touchscreen
Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the Uconnect
display.
Uconnect 5.0 NAV Buttons On The Touchscreen And Customer Programmable Features — 5.0 Settings
Buttons On The Faceplate
Push the Settings button on the faceplate to display the
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen menu setting screen. In this mode the Uconnect system
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
allows you to access programmable features that may be
equipped such as Display, Clock & Date, Safety & Driving
Buttons On The Faceplate Assistance (if equipped), Lights, Doors & Locks, Audio,
Buttons on the faceplate are located below the Uconnect Phone/Bluetooth, SiriusXM Setup (if equipped), Restore
system in the center of the instrument panel. In addition, Settings and Clear Personal Data.
there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right NOTE:
side. Turn the control knob to scroll through menus and
change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), push the center of the • Only one category may be selected at a time.
control knob one or more times to select or change a setting • The Back arrow will change into a Done button if any
(i.e., ON, OFF). changes are made.
When making a selection, press the button on the touch- Display
screen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen, the
mode, press and release the preferred setting. Once the following settings will be available:
setting is complete, either press the Back Arrow button on
the touchscreen or the Back button on the faceplate to
return to the previous menu or press the X button on the
touchscreen to return to the Main Settings screen. Pressing
the Up or Down Arrow buttons on the touchscreen on the
right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or down
through the available settings.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Display Mode Manual Auto
Brightness With Headlights On With Headlights Off
NOTE:
To make changes to the “Brightness” setting, the headlights must be on and the interior dimmer switch must not be
in the ⬙party⬙ or ⬙parade⬙ positions.
Language
NOTE:
When the “Set Language” feature is selected, you may select one of multiple languages (English/Français/Español)
for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the “Set Lan-
guage” button on the touchscreen, then press the desired language button on the touchscreen until a check-mark ap-
pears next to the language, showing that setting has been selected.

Units — If Equipped Distance Consumption Temperature
NOTE: When selecting the “Units” setting, the changes can be made to the Distance (mi, km), Fuel Consumption
(MPG if set to mi, L/100 km or km/L if set to km), and Temperature (°C, °F).
Touchscreen Beep On Off
4
Display Trip B On Off
NOTE: Press the relevant button to activate/deactivate the displaying of the Trip B on the instrument cluster display.
Voice
After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:

Voice Response Brief Long
Length
Show Command List Never With Help Always
NOTE: This Setting will display the possible options while in a voice session.
Clock & Date
After pressing the “Clock & Date” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:

Set Time And For- 12h 24h AM PM
mat — If Equipped
Show Time Statues On Off
— If Equipped
Set Date Day Month
NOTE:
By selecting this Setting, the day and month can be updated. The selectable days range from 1–31 (depending on
month). The selectable months consist of Jan/Feb/March/April/May/June/July/Aug/Sept/Oct/Nov/Dec.
Sync Time — If On Off
Equipped
NOTE: When this setting is selected, the time will set automatically based upon GPS location.
Safety/Assistance
After pressing the “Safety/Assistance” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

ParkView Rear Backup Camera Ac- 4
tive Guide Lines — If Equipped
NOTE: The “ParkView Backup Camera Active Guide Lines” setting overlays the Rear Backup Camera image with
active, or dynamic, grid lines to help illustrate the width of the vehicle and its project back up path, based on the
steering wheel position when the option is checked. A dashed center line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to
assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.
ParkView Backup Camera Delay — On Off
If Equipped
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen will display the rear view image
with dynamic grid lines for up to ten seconds after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay will be canceled
if the vehicle’s speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is switched to
the OFF position.
Lights
After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen, the

Daytime Running Lights — If On Off
Equipped
NOTE: When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the headlights will turn on whenever the engine is
running.
Doors & Locks
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touch-

Auto Door Locks On Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto Door Locks” feature is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of
12 mph (20 km/h).
Engine Off Options
After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Radio Off Delay 0 min 20 min 4
NOTE: When this Setting is selected, the radio will remain off for the selected amount of time when the engine has
been shut off.
Audio
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen, the

Equalizer + –
NOTE: When in this display you may adjust the “Bass”, “Mid” and “Treble” settings. Adjust the settings with the
“+” and “–” setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale between the “+” and “–” but-
tons on the touchscreen. Bass/Mid/Treble also allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the set-
ting as well as press directly on the desired setting.

Balance Speaker Icon Arrow Buttons
NOTE: When in this display you may adjust the “Balance/Fade” of the audio by using the “Arrow” button on the
touchscreen to adjust the sound level from the front and rear or right and left side speakers. Press the “Speaker Icon”
on the touchscreen to reset the balance and fade to the factory setting.
Speed Adjusted Volume Off 1 2 3
— If Equipped
NOTE: The “Speed Adjusted Volume” feature increases or decreases volume relative to vehicle speed.
Surround Sound — If On Off
Equipped
Loudness — If On Off
Equipped
NOTE: The “Loudness” feature improves sound quality at lower volumes when enabled.
Auto - On Radio On Off Last Recall
NOTE: Press the “Auto - On Radio” button on the touchscreen to set how the radio behaves when the ignition is
switched to ON.
AUX Volume Offset + –
NOTE: This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the AUX in-
put.
Phone/Bluetooth
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the touch-

Paired Phones/Devices List of Paired Phones/Devices 4
NOTE:
This feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer to the
Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touch-

Channel Skip List of Channels
NOTE:
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude
undesirable channels while scanning. This feature allows you to select the channels you would like to skip.

Subscription Info Sirius ID
NOTE:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your
radio. Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription
Information screen to re-subscribe.
1. Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
2. Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the
screen or visit the provider online.
SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription and is available for U.S. residents only.
Radio Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the “Radio Setup” button (if equipped) on
the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Traffic Announcement On Off
NOTE:
Allows the system to pause the radio or a media device to issue a traffic bulletin.

Alternative Frequency On Off
NOTE:
Allows the frequency to change automatically to maintain the strongest signal.
Regional On Off
4
NOTE: Forces the system to select from a network station when the system is present in a different region.
Restore Settings — If Equipped
After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the touch-

Restore Settings Yes Cancel
NOTE: When this feature is selected, it will reset the Display, Clock, Audio, and Radio Settings to their default set-
tings. Once the settings are restored, a pop up appears stating ⬙settings reset to default.⬙ Press the okay button on the
touchscreen to exit.
Clear Personal Data
After pressing the “Clear Personal Data Settings” button on
the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Clear Personal Data Yes No
NOTE: When this feature is selected, it will remove personal data including Bluetooth devices and presets.
UCONNECT RADIOS
For detailed information about your Uconnect radio, refer
to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
IPOD/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED

The USB Input and Auxiliary Jack is located on the
instrument panel below the Climate Controls. This feature
allows an iPod or external USB device to be plugged into
the USB port.
USB Input And AUX Jack

iPod control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod and The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a
iPhone devices. Some iPod software versions may not fully push-button in the center. Pushing the top of the switch
support the iPod control features. Please visit Apple’s will increase the volume, and pushing the bottom of the
website for software updates. switch will decrease the volume.
For further information, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s The button located in the center of the right hand control
Manual Supplement. will switch modes to Radio, AUX or other valid audio 4
sources.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a
push-button in the center. The function of the left hand
The remote sound system controls are located on the back
control is different depending on which mode you are in.
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches. The following describes the left hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next
listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch will
SEEK down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left hand control will
tune to the next pre-set station that you have programmed
in the radio pre-set buttons.
Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of Steering Wheel)

RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES CLIMATE CONTROLS
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in your Manual Climate Control Overview
vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your
radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated by
relocating the mobile phone. This condition is not harmful to
the radio. If your radio performance does not satisfactorily
“clear” by the repositioning of the phone, it is recommended
that the radio volume be turned down or off during mobile
phone operation when not using Uconnect (if equipped).
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: Manual Climate Control
• This device may not cause harmful interference, and
• This device must accept any interference received, includ-
ing interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Manual Climate Control Descriptions
Icon Description
A/C Button
Push the A/C button to engage the Air Conditioning (A/C). A LED will illuminate when the
A/C system is engaged. 4
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air
mode. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high
humidity are present.
NOTE:
• Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fog-
ging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
• The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp weather could cause windows to fog on
the inside, because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Select the outside air position for
maximum defogging.
• Recirculation can be used in all modes except for Defrost.
• The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection.
Front Defrost
Turn the knob to the Front Defrost position. Air comes from the windshield and side window
demist outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost
mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and
defogging.
Icon Description
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn ON the rear window defroster and the
heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window de-
froster is ON. The rear window defroster automatically turns OFF after ten minutes.
Temperature Control
Use this control to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger compartment. Rotat-
ing the knob counterclockwise, from top center into the blue area of the scale, indicates cooler
temperatures. Rotating the knob clockwise, into the red area, indicates warmer temperatures.
Blower Control
There are seven blower speeds. Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the
system in any mode you select. The blower speed increases as you move the control clockwise
from the OFF position.
NOTE: Depending on the configuration, your vehicle may be equipped with four blower
speeds.
Icon Description
Modes Control
Push the button in the center of the knob to change the airflow distribution mode. The airflow
distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,
defrost outlets and demist outlets. The Mode settings are as follows:
Panel Mode Panel Mode 4
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be
moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel lo-
cated below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed
through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
NOTE:
BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel out-
lets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side
window demister outlets.
Icon Description
Mix Mode Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works
best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good
for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
System Maintenance
In winter, the climate control system must be turned on at • Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
least once a month for about ten minutes. window cleaners on the interior surface of the win-
Have the system inspected at a Ram dealership before the dow.
summer. • Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
Climate Control Functions

CAUTION!
A/C (Air Conditioning)
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements: The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator to
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear win- manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning sys-
dow. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the tem. When the air conditioning system is turned on, cool
interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into the
mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heat- cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the A/C button to
ing elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking turn off the air conditioning and manually adjust the
with warm water. blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make sure to select
only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes.
(Continued)
NOTE: Operating Tips
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass, NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
select Defrost mode and increase blower speed if suggested control settings for various weather conditions.
needed.
Summer Operation
• If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (located The engine cooling system must be protected with a 4
in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of dirt or high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion
insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from the front of protection and to protect against engine overheating. OAT
the radiator and through the condenser. coolant (conforming to MS.90032) is recommended. Refer
to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Ve-
Recirculation hicle” for proper coolant selection.
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or high humidity, Winter Operation
or if rapid cooling is desired, you may wish to recirculate
interior air by pressing the Recirculation control button. To ensure the best possible heater and defroster perfor-
The recirculation indicator will illuminate when this button mance, make sure the engine cooling system is functioning
is selected. Press the button a second time to turn off the properly and the proper amount, type, and concentration
Recirculation mode and allow outside air into the vehicle. of coolant is used. Refer to “Maintenance Procedure” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.
NOTE: In cold weather, use of recirculation mode may lead to Use of the air Recirculation mode during Winter months is
excessive window fogging. On systems with Manual Climate not recommended because it may cause window fogging.
Controls, the Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost
mode to improve window clearing operation. Recirculation
will be disabled automatically if this mode is selected. At-
tempting to use Recirculation while in this mode will cause the
LED in the control button to blink and then turn off.
Vacation/Storage Outside Air Intake
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air condi- windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
tioning system at idle for about five minutes in fresh air collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, can cause
with the blower setting on high. This will ensure adequate odor, and if they enter the plenum they could plug the
system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compres- water drains. In Winter months make sure the air intake is
sor damage when the system is started again. clear of ice, slush and snow.
Window Fogging A/C Air Filter
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside of the glass in The climate control system filters outside air containing
mild, rainy and/or humid weather. Windows may frost on dust, pollen and some odors. Strong odors cannot be totally
the inside of the glass in very cold weather. To clear the filtered out. Refer to “Maintenances Procedure” in “Main-
windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and increase the taining Your Vehicle” for filter replacement instructions.
front blower speed. Do not use the Recirculation mode
without A/C for long periods, as fogging may occur.
NOTE: Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) will auto-
matically adjust the climate control settings to reduce or
eliminate window fogging on the front windshield. When
this occurs, recirculation will be unavailable.
Control Setting Suggestions For Various Weather Conditions
Control Settings Suggestions For Various Weather Conditions Chart

UCONNECT 5.0 VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK
TIPS — IF EQUIPPED
Introducing Uconnect
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these helpful
quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and tips
you need to know to control your Uconnect 5.0/5.0 NAV
system.
Key Features:
• 5.0” Full Color Touchscreen Display
• Bluetooth With Integrated Voice Control
• GPS Navigation (If Equipped) Uconnect 5.0/5.0 NAV
Get Started
All you need to control your Uconnect system with your
voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.
1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and fea-
ture compatibility and to find phone pairing instructions.
2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger conversa-
tions are examples of noise that may impact recognition.
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing
straight ahead. The microphone is positioned on the
rearview mirror and aimed at the driver.
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first Radio
push either the VR or Phone button, wait until after the Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM
beep, then say your Voice Command. Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear. (Subscrip-
5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts tion or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.)
by pushing the VR or Phone button and saying a Voice Push the VR button . After the beep, sayѧ
Command from current category. 4
• Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM
• Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1
Uconnect Voice Command

1 — Push to Mute
2 — Push To Begin Radio Or Media Functions
3 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Receive A Text
4 — Push To End Call
TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or want Push the VR button . After the beep, sayѧ
to learn a Voice Command, press the VR button and say • Cancel to stop a current voice session
“Help.” The system will provide you with a list of
commands. • Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
• Repeat to listen to the system prompts again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice
recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the touch-
screen.
Uconnect 5.0/5.0 NAV Radio

Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any
point while using your Uconnect system. Uconnect 5.0/5.0 NAV
Media
Uconnect offers connections via USB, Bluetooth and auxil-
iary ports (if equipped). Voice operation is only available
for connected USB and iPod devices.
Push the VR button . After the beep, say one of the
following commands and follow the prompts to switch 4
your media source or choose an artist.
• Change source to Bluetooth
• Change source to AUX
• Change source to USB
• Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest Hits; Play Uconnect 5.0/5.0 NAV Media
song Moonlight Sonata; Play genre Classical Phone
TIP: Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy with
of the music on your iPod or USB device. Your Voice Uconnect. When the Phonebook button is illuminated on
Command must match exactly how the artist, album, song your touchscreen, your system is ready. Check
and genre information is displayed. UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and
pairing instructions.
Push the Phone button . After the beep, say one of the
following commandsѧ
• Call John Smith
• Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts
• Redial (call previous outgoing phone number) Voice Text Reply
• Call back (call previous incoming phone number) Uconnect will announce incoming text messages. Push the
Phone button and say Listen. (Must have compatible
TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the Phone
mobile phone paired to Uconnect system.)
button and say “Call,” then pronounce the name
exactly as it appears in your phone book. When a 1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push the
contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say “Call Phone button . After the beep, say: “Reply”.
John Smith work.”
2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the beep, repeat
one of the pre-defined messages and follow the system
prompts.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES

Yes. Stuck in Traffic. See you later.
Start without
No. I’ll be Late.
me.
Okay. Where are you? I will be <num-
Are you there ber> minutes
Call me. late.
yet?
I need See you in
I’ll call you later.
directions. <number> of
Uconnect 5.0/5.0 NAV Phone I’m on my way. minutes.
Can’t talk right
I’m lost. now. Thanks.
TIP: Your mobile phone must have the full implementation Uconnect System Support:
of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to take advantage of • U.S. residents call 1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days
this feature. For details about MAP, visit a week) or visit DriveUconnect.com
UconnectPhone.com. Apple iPhone iOS6 or later supports
reading incoming text messages only. • Canadian residents call 1-800-465-2001 (English) or
1-800-387-9983 (French) or visit DriveUconnect.ca
Additional Information • Mon. – Fri., 8:00 am – 8:00 pm, ET 4
© 2017 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and • Sat., 9:00 am – 5:00 pm, ET
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner • Sun., Closed
Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android is a Uconnect Access Services Support 1-855-792-4241. Please
trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks have your Uconnect Security PIN ready when you call.
and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc. Yelp, Yelp
logo, Yelp burst and related marks are registered trade-
marks of Yelp.
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184 ▫ Acceleration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184 ▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
5
▫ Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184 䡵 DRIVING THROUGH WATER . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
▫ Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or −29°C) . . .184 ▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
▫ Extended Park Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185 ▫ Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185 䡵 POWER STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
▫ After Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185 ▫ Power Steering Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
䡵 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . . .186 䡵 PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186 䡵 BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188 䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . . .200
▫ Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System . . . . .188 ▫ Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . .200
▫ Nine-Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . .188 ▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
▫ Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189 ▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
䡵 DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES . . . . . . . . . .195 ▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
182 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . .203 ▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
▫ ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And ▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
ESC OFF Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
▫ Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . . .206
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
䡵 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) . . . . . . . . .226
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . . .227
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . . .210
䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . . .211 TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . .212 ▫ Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . .217 ▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217 ▫ Temperature Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218 䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . . .219
▫ System Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
▫ Tire Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
▫ Run Flat Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
▫ 2.4L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
STARTING AND OPERATING 183
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233 ▫ Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles. . . . . . . . .234 䡵 TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
▫ CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications . . . . . .234 ▫ Common Towing Definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234 ▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235 䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
▫ Fuel System Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235 5
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . . .248
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
▫ Recreational Towing — Automatic
䡵 ADDING FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
䡵 VEHICLE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
STARTING PROCEDURES Normal Starting
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts. is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
pedal.
WARNING! Turn the ignition switch to the AVV/ACC (START) posi-
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with tion and release it when the engine starts. If the engine fails
access to an unlocked vehicle. to start within 10 seconds, turn the ignition switch to the
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is STOP (OFF/LOCK) position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or −29°C)
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the transmission gear selector. To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in externally powered electric engine block heater (available
a location accessible to children). A child could from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
operate power windows, other controls, or move the To prevent possible engine damage while starting at low
vehicle. temperatures, this vehicle will inhibit engine cranking
when the ambient temperature is less than -31°F (-35° C)
Automatic Transmission and the oil temperature sensor reading indicates an engine
The gear selector must be in the PARK or NEUTRAL block heater has not been used. The message “plug in
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes engine heater” will be displayed in the instrument cluster
before shifting to any driving gear. when the ambient temperature is below -25°F (-32° C) at
the time the engine is shut off as a reminder.
NOTE: You must press the brake pedal before shifting out
of PARK.
Extended Park Starting If Engine Fails To Start
NOTE: Extended Park condition occurs when the vehicle
has not been started or driven for at least 30 days.
WARNING!
1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables to the battery Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the
to ensure a full battery charge during the crank cycle. throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the
vehicle. This could result in a flash fire causing serious
2. Cycle the ignition in the START position and release it personal injury.
when the engine starts. 5
3. If the engine fails to start within 10 to 15 seconds, cycle CAUTION!
the ignition to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position, wait
five seconds to allow the starter to cool, then repeat the • Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
Extended Park Starting procedure. started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-
mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
4. If the engine fails to start after eight attempts, allow the could enter the catalytic converter and once the
starter to cool for at least 10 minutes, then repeat the engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
procedure. and vehicle.
• To prevent damage to the starter, do not continuously
CAUTION! crank the engine for more than 15 seconds at a time.
Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank continu-
ously for more than 10 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to 15 After Starting
seconds before trying again.
The idle speed is controlled automatically, and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED NOTE:
The engine block heater warms the engine and permits • The engine block heater cord is a factory installed
quicker starts in cold weather. option. If your vehicle is not equipped, heater cords are
available from your authorized Mopar dealer.
Connect the cord to a 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with
a grounded, three-wire extension cord. • The engine block heater will require 110 Volts AC and
6.5 Amps to activate the heater element.
For ambient temperatures below 0°F (-18°C), the engine
block heater is recommended. For ambient temperatures • The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one
below -20°F (-29°C), the engine block heater is required. hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.
The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood, WARNING!
behind to the driver’s side headlamp. Follow the steps
below to properly use the engine block heater: Remember to disconnect the engine block heater cord
before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt electrical
1. Locate the engine block heater cord (behind the driver’s
cord could cause electrocution.
side headlamp).
2. Undo the Velcro strap that secures the heater cord in AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
place.
3. Pull the cord to the front of the vehicle and plug it into
WARNING!
a grounded, three-wire extension cord. • It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if
4. After the vehicle is running, reattach the cord to the the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your
Velcro strap and properly stow away behind the driver’s foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
side headlamp.
(Continued)

vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re- fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the trans-
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the mission gear selector.
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly • Do not leave the ignition key in or near the vehicle
pressing the brake pedal. (or in a location accessible to children). A child could
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure operate power windows, other controls, or move the
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you vehicle. 5
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle always come to a CAUTION!
complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift
the transmission into PARK, turn the engine OFF, Damage to the transmission may occur if the following
and remove the ignition key. Once the key is re- precautions are not observed:
moved, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing • Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the
the vehicle against unwanted movement. vehicle has come to a complete stop.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the igni- • Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL,
tion key from the vehicle and lock the vehicle. or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with • Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to firmly pressing the brake pedal.
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
(Continued)
Key Ignition Park Interlock selector and move the lever rearward or forward. You must
also press the brake pedal to shift the transmission out of
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock
PARK, or to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE
which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the
when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds (refer
ignition can be turned to the full LOCK/OFF (key removal)
to ⬙Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System⬙ in this
position. The key can only be removed from the ignition
section). Select the DRIVE range for normal driving.
when the ignition is in the full LOCK/OFF mode, and once
removed the transmission is locked in PARK. The electronically-controlled transmission provides a pre-
cise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are self-
Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System
calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and
Interlock system (BTSI) that holds the transmission gear precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles or
selector in PARK unless the brakes are applied. To shift the kilometers.
transmission out of PARK, the ignition must be turned to
The nine-speed transmission has been developed to meet
the ON/RUN mode (engine running or not) and the brake
the needs of current and future FWD/AWD vehicles.
pedal must be pressed.
Software and calibration is refined to optimize the custom-
The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift from NEU- er’s driving experience and fuel economy. By design, some
TRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is vehicle and driveline combinations utilize 9th gear only in
stopped or moving at low speeds. very specific driving situations and conditions.
Nine-Speed Automatic Transmission Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. Be
The transmission gear range (PRND) is displayed both
sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting
beside the gear selector and in the instrument cluster. To
between these gears.
select a gear range, press the lock button on the gear
The transmission gear selector has PARK, REVERSE, NEU-
TRAL, DRIVE, and Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift
positions. Manual downshifts can be made using the ERS
shift control (refer to ⬙Electronic Range Select (ERS) Opera-
tion⬙ in this section for further information). Moving the
gear selector into the ERS (-/+) position (beside the DRIVE
position) activates ERS mode, displays the current gear in
the instrument cluster, and prevents automatic upshifts 5
beyond this gear. In ERS mode, toggling the gear selector
forward (-) or rearward (+) will change the highest avail-
able gear.
NOTE: If the gear selector cannot be moved to the PARK,
REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed forward) Gear Selector
it is probably in the ERS (+/-) position (beside the DRIVE Gear Ranges
position). In ERS mode, the transmission gear limit (1, 2, 3, DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
etc.) is displayed in the instrument cluster. Move the gear NEUTRAL into another gear range.
selector to the right (into the DRIVE [D] position) for access
to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL. NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This
is especially important when the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
WARNING!
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range. • Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle
range. movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the gear
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking selector out of PARK with the brake pedal released.
brake. Make sure the transmission is in PARK before exit-
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before ing the vehicle.
shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on • It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if
the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your
to move the gear selector out of PARK. As an added foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade. verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
When exiting the vehicle, always: engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
• Apply the parking brake, pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
• Shift the transmission into PARK,
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
• Turn the engine OFF, and should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
• Remove the ignition key. running. Before exiting a vehicle always come to a
complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued) CAUTION!

the transmission into PARK, turn the engine OFF, • Before moving the transmission gear selector out of
and remove the ignition key. Once the key is re- PARK, you must turn the ignition to the ON/RUN
moved, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing mode, and also press the brake pedal. Otherwise,
the vehicle against unwanted movement. damage to the gear selector could result.
• When exiting the vehicle, always remove the ignition • DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK
key from the vehicle and lock the vehicle. or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with 5
damage the drivetrain.
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number The following indicators should be used to ensure that you
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or have engaged the transmission into the PARK position:
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
• When shifting into PARK, press the lock button on the
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the trans-
gear selector and firmly move the selector all the way
mission gear selector.
forward until it stops and is fully seated.
• Do not leave the ignition key in or near the vehicle
(or in a location accessible to children). A child could • Look at the transmission gear position display and
operate power windows, other controls, or move the verify that it indicates the PARK position (P).
vehicle. • With brake pedal released, verify that the gear selector
will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
NEUTRAL (N) DRIVE (D)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged This range should be used for most city and highway
periods with the engine running. The engine may be driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts,
started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift the and the best fuel economy. The transmission automatically
transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle. upshifts through all forward gears. The DRIVE position
provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal
WARNING! operating conditions.
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as when
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in
that limit your response to changing traffic or road hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or while
conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and towing a heavy trailer), use the Electronic Range Select
have a collision. (ERS) shift control (refer to “Electronic Range Select (ERS)
Operation” in this section for further information) to select
a lower gear range. Under these conditions, using a lower
CAUTION! gear range will improve performance and extend transmis-
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other sion life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operating
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational limits, the transmission controller may modify the trans-
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A mission shift schedule, reduce engine torque, and/or ex-
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for pand the range of torque converter clutch engagement.
further information. This is done to prevent transmission damage due to
overheating.
If the transmission becomes extremely hot, the “Transmis- Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be driven to an
sion Temperature Warning Light” may illuminate and the authorized dealer for service without damaging the trans-
transmission may operate differently until the transmission mission.
cools down.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission can
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may be be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
modified depending on engine and transmission tempera- following steps:
ture as well as vehicle speed. This feature improves warm
1. Stop the vehicle.
up time of the engine and transmission to achieve maxi- 5
mum efficiency. Engagement of the torque converter 2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
clutch, and shifts into 8th or 9th gear, are inhibited until the
3. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.
transmission fluid is warm (refer to the “Note” under
“Torque Converter Clutch” in this section). Normal opera- 4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
tion will resume once the transmission temperature has
5. Restart the engine.
risen to a suitable level.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
Transmission Limp Home Mode
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
Transmission function is monitored electronically for ab- operation.
normal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest
possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has diagnos-
in fourth gear regardless of which forward gear is selected.
tic equipment to determine if the problem could recur. If
PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operate.
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer service
is required.
Torque Converter Clutch You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any
vehicle speed. When the gear selector is in the DRIVE
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
position, the transmission will operate automatically, shift-
included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle. A
ing between all available gears.
clutch within the torque converter engages automatically
at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly different Moving the gear selector to the ERS position (beside
feeling or response during normal operation in the upper DRIVE) will activate ERS mode, display the current gear in
gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during some the instrument cluster, and set that gear as the top available
accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages. gear. Once in ERS mode, moving the gear selector forward
(-) or rearward (+) will change the top available gear and it
NOTE: The torque converter clutch will not engage until
will be displayed in the instrument cluster.
the transmission fluid is warm [usually after 1 to 3 miles (2
to 5 km) of driving]. Because the engine speed is higher To exit ERS mode, simply return the gear selector to the
when the torque converter clutch is not engaged, it may DRIVE position.
seem as if the transmission is not shifting properly when
cold. This is normal. The torque converter clutch will WARNING!
function normally once the transmission is sufficiently
warm. Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control allows the personal injury.
driver to limit the highest available gear. For example, if
you set the transmission gear limit to 5 (fifth gear), the NOTE: To select the proper gear position for maximum
transmission will not shift above fifth gear, but will shift deceleration (engine braking), move the gear selector into
through the lower gears normally. the ERS position, then simply press and hold it forward (-).
The transmission will shift to the range from which the
vehicle can best be slowed down.
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping
ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precautions
Acceleration
should be observed:
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slippery • Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull erratically to slushy.
the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when there is a
difference in the surface traction under the front (driving) • Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
wheels. • Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first be- 5
come visible.
WARNING!
• Keep tires properly inflated.
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous. • Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the front the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a
wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and sudden stop.
possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and care-
fully whenever there is likely to be poor traction (ice, DRIVING THROUGH WATER
snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
Driving through water more than a few inches/centimeters
Traction deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and pre-
vent damage to your vehicle.
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is known as hydroplaning, and may cause
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING! • Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s
braking capabilities, which increases stopping dis-
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water is tances. Therefore, after driving through standing
flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the brake
water can wear away the road or path’s surface and pedal several times to dry the brakes.
cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water. Further- • Failure to follow these warnings may result in inju-
more, flowing and/or rising water can carry your ve- ries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers,
hicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this warning may and others around you.
result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you. CAUTION!
Shallow Standing Water • Always check the depth of the standing water before
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shal- driving through it. Never drive through standing
low standing water, consider the following Cautions and water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims
Warnings before doing so. mounted on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path that
WARNING! is under water and if there are any obstacles in the
way before driving through the standing water.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s • Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through
traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) standing water. This will minimize wave effects.
when driving through standing water.
(Continued)
(Continued)
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these condi-
• Driving through standing water may cause damage tions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always in- effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
spect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, transmis- parking maneuvers.
sion, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e., fluid
that is milky or foamy in appearance) after driving NOTE:
through standing water. Do not continue to operate • Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel
the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated, as this 5
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that
may result in further damage. Such damage is not there is a problem with the power steering system.
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can cause
pump may make noise for a short amount of time. This
it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious internal
is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering system. This
damage to the engine. Such damage is not covered by
noise should be considered normal, and it does not in
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
any way damage the steering system.
POWER STEERING
CAUTION!
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end of
tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical steering the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid
capability if power assist is lost. temperature and it should be avoided when possible.
Damage to the power steering pump may occur.
Power Steering Fluid Check PARKING BRAKE
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
interval is not required. The fluid should be checked at every brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to leave an auto-
oil change if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are apparent, matic transmission in PARK, or manual transmission in
and/or the system is not functioning as anticipated. Coordi- REVERSE or first gear.
nate inspection efforts through an authorized dealer.
The parking brake lever is located in the center console. To
apply the parking brake, pull the lever up as firmly as
WARNING! possible. To release the parking brake, pull the lever up
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and slightly, press the center button, then lower the lever
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving completely.
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do not
overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended power
steering fluid.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering
system as the chemicals can damage your power steer-
ing components. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated

level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
Parking Brake
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts”
in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch
WARNING!
in the ON position, the “Brake Warning Light” in the
instrument cluster will illuminate. • When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key fob
NOTE: from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
• When the parking brake is applied and the automatic access to an unlocked vehicle.
transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning • Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
Light” will flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others 5
will sound to alert the driver. Fully release the parking could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
brake before attempting to move the vehicle. should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied. brake pedal or the gear selector.
It does not show the degree of brake application. • Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children. A child could oper-
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front ate power windows, other controls, or move the
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away vehicle.
from the curb on an uphill grade. For vehicles equipped • Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before
with an automatic transmission, apply the parking brake driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and
before placing the gear selector in PARK, otherwise the a collision.
load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it • Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving
difficult to move the gear selector out of PARK. The your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or
parking brake should always be applied whenever the injury. Also, be certain to leave an automatic trans-
driver is not in the vehicle. mission in PARK, a manual transmission in RE-
VERSE or first gear. Failure to do so may cause the
vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
CAUTION!
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on with the brake control system that includes the Anti-Lock Brake
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction is System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Traction Control
indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an au- System (TCS), Hill Start Assist (HSA), and Electronic
thorized dealer immediately. Stability Control (ESC). All systems work together to
enhance vehicle stability and control in various driving
BRAKE SYSTEM conditions and are commonly referred to as ESC.
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake sys- Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
tems. If either of the two hydraulic systems loses normal
capability, the remaining system will still function. How- The Four-Wheel ABS is designed to aid the driver in
ever, there will be some loss of overall braking effective- maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking condi-
ness. You may notice increased pedal travel during appli- tions. The system operates with a separate computer to
cation, greater pedal force required to slow or stop, and modulate hydraulic pressure, to prevent wheel lock-up
potential activation of the “Brake System Warning Light”. and to help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e., The system’s pump motor runs during an ABS stop to
repeated brake applications with the engine off), the brakes provide regulated hydraulic pressure. The pump motor
will still function. However, the effort required to brake the makes a low humming noise during operation, which is
vehicle will be much greater than that required with the normal.
power system operating.
The ABS includes an amber ABS Warning Light. When the When you are in a severe braking condition involving the
light is illuminated, the ABS is not functioning. The system use of the ABS, you will experience some pedal drop as the
reverts to standard non-anti-lock brakes. Turning the igni- vehicle comes to a stop. This is the result of the system
tion Off and On again may reset the ABS if the fault reverting to the base brake system.
detected was only momentary.
Engagement of the ABS may be accompanied by a pulsing
sensation. You may also hear a clicking noise. These
WARNING! occurrences are normal and indicate that the system is
• Pumping the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their functioning properly. 5
effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping Brake Assist System (BAS)
makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly
on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
stop. capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The sys-
• The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent tem detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the
the natural laws of physics from acting on the rate and amount of brake application and then applies
vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering effi- optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce
ciency beyond that afforded by the condition of the braking distances. The BAS complements the Anti-Lock
vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded. Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. during the stopping sequence (do not “pump” the brakes).
• The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous man- longer desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is
ner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the deactivated.
safety of others.
slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven
WARNING!
axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than
• The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the the other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, wheel. This will allow more engine torque to be applied to
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing the wheel that is not spinning. This feature remains active
road conditions. even if TCS and ESC are in the Partial Off mode. Refer to
• The BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those “Electronic Stability Control (ESC)” in this section for
resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on further information.
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Hill Start Assist (HSA)
• The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when
which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain
of others. the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short
period of time after the driver takes his foot off the brake
Traction Control System (TCS) pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle during this
The Traction Control System (TCS) monitors the amount of short period of time, the system will release brake pressure
wheel spin of each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is and the vehicle will roll down the hill. The system will
detected, brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) release brake pressure in proportion to the amount of
and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced accel- throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in the
eration and stability. A feature of the TCS system, Brake intended direction of travel.
Limited Differential (BLD), functions similar to a limited
HSA Activation Criteria Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to This system enhances directional control and stability of
activate: the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects
• Vehicle must be stopped. for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by apply-
ing the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counter-
• Vehicle must be on a 5% grade or greater hill. acting the oversteering or understeering condition. Engine
• Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e., power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain
vehicle in NEUTRAL (manual transmission), vehicle the desired path. ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to 5
facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and
in REVERSE gear). compares it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the
actual path does not match the intended path, ESC applies
WARNING! the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteract-
ing the oversteer or understeer condition.
There may be situations on minor hills with a loaded
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
vehicle, or while pulling a trailer, when the system will
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
not activate and slight rolling may occur. This could
cause a collision with another vehicle or object. Always • Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
remember the driver is responsible for braking the appropriate for the steering wheel position.
vehicle.
WARNING!
• The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot pre-
vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
(Continued)
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent all
accidents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent collisions re- in the instrument cluster will come on when the
sulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate ignition switch is turned to the MAR (ON/RUN)
driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive, position for four seconds. If the ESC Activation/
and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabili- Malfunction Indicator Light comes on continuously with
ties of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be ex- the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the
ploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition
jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles
• Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly main- (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see
tain your vehicle, may change the handling charac- your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
teristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect problem diagnosed and corrected.
the performance of the ESC system. Changes to the The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light (located
steering system, suspension, braking system, tire in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as the tires
type and size or wheel size may adversely affect ESC lose traction and the ESC system becomes active. The ESC
performance. Improperly inflated and unevenly Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when
worn tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any TCS is active. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
vehicle modification or poor vehicle maintenance Light begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC system can accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to
increase the risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road
rollover, personal injury and death. conditions.
NOTE: Partial Off
• The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and The “ESC OFF” button is located in the switch bank above
the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momentarily each the climate control. To enter the “Partial Off” mode,
time the ignition switch is turned ON. momentarily push the “ESC OFF” button and the “ESC
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system will Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” will illuminate.
be ON even if it was turned off previously. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push the “ESC
OFF” button and the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indica-
tor Light” will turn off. This will restore the normal “ESC 5
The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the Elec- On” mode of operation.
tronic Stability Control (ESC) is partially off.
ESC Operating Modes

The ESC system has two available operating modes.
Full On
This is the normal operating mode for ESC. Whenever the
vehicle is started the system will be in this mode. This
mode should be used for most driving situations. ESC
should only be turned to “Partial Off” for specific reasons
as noted. Refer to “Partial Off” for additional information.
ESC Off Switch
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then applies the
with snow chains, or when starting off in deep snow, sand, appropriate brake and may also reduce engine power to
or gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Partial Off” lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM will only
mode by momentarily pushing the “ESC OFF” button. intervene during very severe or evasive driving maneu-
Once the situation requiring “Partial Off” mode is over- vers.
come, turn ESC back on by momentarily pushing the “ESC ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring
OFF” button. This may be done while the vehicle is in during severe or evasive driving maneuvers. It cannot
motion. prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as road
conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking objects or other
WARNING! vehicles.
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality of
ESC (except for the limited slip feature described in WARNING!
the TCS section) has been disabled and the “ESC Off Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions,
Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When in “Partial and driving conditions, influence the chance that
Off” mode, the engine power reduction of TCS is wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot prevent
disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability offered by all wheel lift or rollovers, especially those that involve
the ESC system is reduced. leaving the roadway or striking objects or other ve-
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) hicles. The capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the speed safety of others.
of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate of
change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed are
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION NOTE:
Tire Markings • P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation.
Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the 5
section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire size
designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the letters
“LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the
size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
1 — U.S. DOT Safety 4 — Maximum Load
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary emer-
Standards Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation 5 — Maximum Pressure gency use only. Temporary high pressure compact spare
3 — Service Description 6 — Treadwear, Traction tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into the sidewall
and Temperature Grades preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18
103M.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design stan-
dards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into
the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
– Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
– ⬙R⬙ means radial construction, or
– ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
– A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
EXAMPLE:
H = Speed Symbol
– A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under cer-
tain operating conditions
– The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating condi-
tions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire: 5
• XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
• LL = Light load tire or
• C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
Tire Identification Number (TIN) the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as
mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire;
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of
the tire.
white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date
code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
• This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards
and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
• 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
• 01 means the year 2001
• Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the
tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located be-
hind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the
vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. In- 5
flation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch)
or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold
tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is
molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure as
shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s
loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressures.
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including the
spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and inflate to the
recommended pressure for your vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
WARNING!
• Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
Example Tire Placard Location (Door) cause collisions.
(Continued)
Tire And Loading Information Placard
• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result
in over-heating and tire failure.
• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuck holes can cause
damage that results in tire failure.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems.
You could lose control of your vehicle. 5
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right
or left.
• Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect ve-
hicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure. This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and spare
tires.
Loading Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit—
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the (1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of
load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you adhere to XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation
pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information (2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and
placard in “Vehicle Loading” in “Starting And Operating”, passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
or the Tire Information Supplement, located in your Own- (3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
er’s Information kit. passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross (4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of
axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
must not be exceeded. Refer to “Vehicle Loading” in amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb
“Starting And Operating”, or the Tire Information Supple- passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available
ment located in your Owner’s Information kit, for further cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750
information on GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer tow- (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
ing.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer
tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the
weight referenced here.
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and NOTE:
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not • If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The following
capacity calculated in Step 4. table shows examples on how to calculate total load,
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult with varying seating configurations and number and
this manual to determine how this reduces the available size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle. only and may not be accurate for the seating and load 5
carry capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
• For the following example, the combined weight of
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg, and there occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
will be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the amount of (392 kg).
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635-
340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the rec-
ommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never over-
load them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure • Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect vehicle
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas vehicle control.
are affected by improper tire pressure: • Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems.
You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Safety and Vehicle Stability
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
• Economy to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right 5
• Tread Wear or left.

• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
• Ride Comfort mended cold tire inflation pressure.
Safety
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish
WARNING! response or over responsiveness in the steering.
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can NOTE:
cause collisions.
• Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result • Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
in overheating and tire failure. erratic and unpredictable steering response.
• Overinflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion • Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause vehicle to drift left or right.
damage that result in tire failure.
Fuel Economy
(Continued) Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could
wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the need damage the valve stem.
for earlier tire replacement.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure is
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride. defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride. driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
Tire Inflation Pressures (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The
cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side door.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
At least once a month: of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with tem-
• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality pocket- perature changes.
type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual judgement when Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
determining proper inflation. Tires may look properly in- 12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
flated even when they are under-inflated. when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage. the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
CAUTION! outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire inflation
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside
temperature condition.
(Continued)
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa) Radial Ply Tires
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low. WARNING!
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly.
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi- The instability could cause a collision. Always use
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds, radial ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them
with other types of tires. 5
maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very impor-
tant. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading
Tire Repair
may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to
your authorized tire dealer or original equipment vehicle If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it meets
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading the following criteria:
and cold tire inflation pressures. • The tire has not been driven on when flat.
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
WARNING!
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum • The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch (6 mm).
load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could
cause them to fail. You could have a serious collision. Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity additional information.
at continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h). Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced immedi-
ately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and service
description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).
Tire Types
WARNING!
All Season Tires — If Equipped
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
All season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring, could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury or
Summer, Fall and Winter). Traction levels may vary be- death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the
tween different all season tires. All season tires can be possibility of loss of vehicle control.
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the
tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; failure Snow Tires
to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
your vehicle. during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped “mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry condi- If you need snow tires, select tires
tions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice. equivalent in size and type to the origi-
If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be aware nal equipment tires. Use snow tires only
these tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving in sets of four; failure to do so may
conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle when am- adversely affect the safety and handling
bient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if roads are of your vehicle.
covered with ice or snow. For more information, contact an
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
authorized dealer.
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h).
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h), refer to original
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation
pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and Spare Tires — If Equipped
traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead
than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit stud-
of a spare tire, please refer to the “Tire Service Kit” section
ded tires; therefore, local laws should be checked before
located in your Owner’s Information kit for further infor-
using these tire types.
mation.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles CAUTION!
5
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire compact or limited use temporary spare installed.
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a Damage to the vehicle may result.
Run Flat tire reaches the Run Flat mode, it has limited
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately. Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
A Run Flat tire is not repairable. Wheel — If Equipped
It is not recommended to drive a vehicle loaded at full Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel
capacity, or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the Run Flat equivalent in look and function to the original equipment
mode. tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your
See the tire pressure monitoring section for more informa- vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for
tion. your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, refer to an
authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation
pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only. You more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s side door needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact spare tire which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result
descriptions begin with the letter “T” or “S” preceding the size in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped
The collapsible spare is for temporary emergency use only.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a collaps-
tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on
ible spare by looking at the spare tire description on the
your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
Collapsible spare tire description example: 165/80-17 101P.
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment
on the vehicle at any given time. tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on
your vehicle at the first opportunity.
WARNING! Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is properly
Compact and Collapsible spares are for temporary installed to the vehicle. Inflate the collapsible tire using the
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive electric air pump before lowering the vehicle.
(Continued)
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
conventional tire on the collapsible spare wheel, since the The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use
wheel is designed specifically for the collapsible spare tire. only. This tire is identified by a label located on the limited
use spare wheel. This label contains the driving limitations
WARNING! for this spare. This tire may look like the original equipped
Compact and Collapsible spares are for temporary tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not.
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares handling. Since it is not the same as your original equip- 5
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the ment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result WARNING!
in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Limited use spares are for emergency use only. Instal-
Full Size Spare — If Equipped lation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only. speed listed on the limit use spare wheel. Keep in-
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the flated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on your
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size spare side door. Replace (or repair) the original equipment
tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as your tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your
original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle
equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first control.
opportunity.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or
failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do
not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph Tire Tread
(48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when 1 — Worn Tire
you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a spinning 2 — New Tire
wheel, no matter what the speed.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
Tread Wear Indicators grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is
help you in determining when your tires should be re- worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be
placed. replaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for
further information.
Life Of Tire Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with
including, but not limited to: oil, grease, and gasoline.
• Driving style. Replacement Tires
• Tire pressure – Improper cold tire inflation pressures can The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manu-
5
life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement. facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent
to the originals in size, quality and performance when
• Distance driven. replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on “Tread
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or Wear Indicator” in this section. Refer to the Tire and
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced tread Loading Information placard or the Vehicle Certification
life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle maintenance Label for the size designation of your tire. The Load Index
schedule is highly recommended. and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the
original equipment tire sidewall.
WARNING! See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the “Tire Safety
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six Information” section of this manual for more information
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure. It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear
You could lose control and have a collision resulting in tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect
serious injury or death. your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make
sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the
original wheels.
It is recommended you contact your authorized tire dealer
or original equipment dealer with any questions you may
have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use • Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having ad-
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the equate speed capability can result in sudden tire
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. failure and loss of vehicle control.
WARNING! CAUTION!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than that Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
specified for your vehicle. Some combinations of may result in false speedometer and odometer read-
unapproved tires and wheels may change suspen- ings.
sion dimensions and performance characteristics,
resulting in changes to steering, handling, and brak- TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
ing of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable
Due to limited clearance, tire chains or traction devices are
handling and stress to steering and suspension com-
not recommended.
ponents. You could lose control and have a collision
resulting in serious injury or death. Use only the tire
and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your
CAUTION!
vehicle. Damage to the vehicle may result if tire chains are
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity, used.
other than what was originally equipped on your
vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could
result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose
control and have a collision.
(Continued)
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving, and
braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at unequal
rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires. The
benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggres-
5
sive tread designs such as those on all season type tires.
Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud,
snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth,
quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper main- Tire Rotation
tenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or unusual DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
wear should be corrected prior to rotation being per- TIRE QUALITY GRADES
formed. The following tire grading categories were established
The suggested rotation method is the “forward cross” by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern does The specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manu-
not apply to some directional tires that must not be facturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the
reversed. tires on your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal
safety requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear Temperature Grades
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on the The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled condi- representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of
tions on a specified government test course. For example, a heat and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half times as well controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life,
their use, however, and may depart significantly from the and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire
norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of perfor-
and differences in road characteristics and climate. mance, which all passenger vehicle tires must meet
Traction Grades under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.
109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of perfor-
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, mance on the laboratory test wheel, than the minimum
B, and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop required by law.
on wet pavement, as measured under controlled condi-
tions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt WARNING!
and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance. The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
WARNING! Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-
ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on heat buildup and possible tire failure.
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold tire pressure on the placard. Once the low tire pressure
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light) illumi-
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom-
nates, you must increase the tire pressure to the recom-
mended cold tire pressure.
mended cold tire pressure in order for the Tire Pressure
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi Monitoring Telltale Light to turn off. The system will
(7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when the automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring
outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will de- Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives the 5
crease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be driven
inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire pressure for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three the TPMS to receive this information.
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold
period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
(parked for more than three hours) tire pressure of 30 psi
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
(207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the
Refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting And
measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), a temperature
Operating” for information on how to properly inflate the
drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to
vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the
approximately 23 psi (159 kPa). This tire pressure is suffi-
vehicle is driven, this is normal and there should be no
ciently low enough to turn on the Tire Pressure Monitoring
adjustment for this increased pressure.
Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the
tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning limit for Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still be on. In
any reason, including low temperature effects, or natural this situation, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
pressure loss through the tire. will turn off only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s
recommended cold tire pressure value.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
NOTE:
CAUTION!
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire failure or
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and condition.
warnings have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system op- • The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
eration or sensor damage may result when using while adjusting your tire pressure.
replacement equipment that is not of the same size, • Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
sensor to become inoperable. After using an after- ability.
market tire sealant it is recommended that you take
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
sensor function checked.
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge, even if
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-
under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
Light.
which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Sensor. • Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the
tire.
System Operation check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle,
and inflate each tire to the vehicle’s recommended cold
placard pressure value. The system will automatically
This is the TPMS warning indicator located in the
update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Light will extin-
instrument cluster.
guish once the updated tire pressures have been received.
The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this information.
Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem,
Check TPMS Warnings 5
transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the tire
and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system
pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle regularly and to
fault is detected, an audible chime will be activated and a
maintain the proper pressure.
proper text message will be displayed. If the ignition key is
The TPMS consists of the following components: cycled, this sequence will repeat providing the system fault
• Receiver Module. still exists. The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will
turn off when the fault condition no longer exists. A system
• Five Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors. (If Equipped fault can occur with any of the following scenarios:
with Spare Tire)
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings sensors.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illuminate 2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that
in the instrument cluster, an audible chime will be acti- affects radio wave signals.
vated, and a proper text message will be displayed when
one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low. 3. Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible, 4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors. 4. Regular size spare tire (equipped with TPMS sensor):
When mounted, the telltale will turn off during the
NOTE: Your vehicle can be equipped with either Tire
normal drive.
Service Kit, compact spare tire or regular size spare tire
(with or without original TPMS sensor). 5. In all the above cases please check the replacement tire
inflation pressure before driving your vehicle.
1. Tire Service Kit (original tire sealant – if equipped): After
fixing the punctured tire with original tire sealant, the 6. In case of tire replacement, if the vehicle is driven for
original situation will be restored, so system will turn off short periods of time, then the system can take a while
the telltale during the normal drive. to be restored.
2. Compact Spare Tire – if equipped: The compact spare NOTE: For a correct Tire Pressure Monitoring behavior,
wheel is not equipped with TPMS sensor. So when please wait for about 20 minutes in key-off during each tire
mounted, during the normal drive the system will turn substitution.
on the telltale (flashing for approximately 75 sec. then
General Information
remains solid). This condition persists until a wheel
equipped with original TPMS sensor has been mounted This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
on the vehicle. RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
3. Regular size spare tire (not equipped with TPMS sen-
sor): When mounted, during the normal drive the (1) This device may not cause harmful interference.
system will turn on the telltale (flashing for approxi- (2) This device must accept any interference received,
mately 75 sec. then remains solid). This condition per- including interference that may cause undesired operation.
sists until a wheel equipped with original TPMS sensor
has been mounted on the vehicle. Then the system will NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
be restored and the telltale will turn off during the by the party responsible for compliance could void the
normal drive. user’s authority to operate the equipment.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS Reformulated Gasoline
2.4L Engine Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning
gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”. Reformu-
lated gasoline contains oxygenates and are specifically
This engine is designed to meet all emis-
blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
sions regulations and provide optimum
fuel economy and performance when The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Prop-
using high quality unleaded “Regular” erly blended reformulated gasoline will provide improved
5
gasoline having a posted octane number performance and durability of engine and fuel system
of 87 as specified by the (R+M)/2 components.
method. The use of higher octane “Pre- Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
mium” gasoline is not required, as it will not provide any
benefit over “Regular” gasoline in these engines. Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygen-
ates such as ethanol.
While operating on gasoline with an octane number of 87,
hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not a
CAUTION!
cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard making
a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. Use DO NOT use gasoline containing methanol or gasoline
of gasoline with an octane number lower than 87 can cause containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of these
engine failure and may void or not be covered by the New blends may result in starting and drivability problems,
Vehicle Limited Warranty. damage critical fuel system components, cause emissions
to exceed the applicable standard, and/or cause the “Mal-
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
function Indicator Light” to illuminate. Please observe
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
pump labels as they should clearly communicate if a fuel
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before consider-
contains greater than 15% ethanol (E-15).
ing service for the vehicle.
Problems that result from using gasoline containing more CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications
than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol Modifications that allow the engine to run on compressed
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may natural gas (CNG) or liquid propane (LP) may result in
void or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited War- damage to the engine, emissions, and fuel system compo-
ranty. nents. Problems that result from running CNG or LP are
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or
not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasoline
containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Gasoline with higher MMT In Gasoline
ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited War- Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT) is
ranty. a manganese-containing metallic additive that is blended
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 fuel, into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline blended
the engine will have some or all of these symptoms: with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond
• Operate in a lean mode. gasoline of the same octane number without MMT. Gaso-
line blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on. reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles.
• Poor engine performance. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without
MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of
• Poor cold start and cold drivability. gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion. therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
and California reformulated gasoline.
Materials Added To Fuel Fuel System Cautions
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane
rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion, and CAUTION!
stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines that Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
have these additives will help improve fuel economy, performance:
reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle performance. • The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor-
contains a higher level of detergents to mance and damage the emissions control system. 5
further aide in minimizing engine and fuel • An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
system deposits. When available, the us- malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
age of Top Tier Detergent gasoline is rec- overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
ommended. Visit www.toptiergas.com for some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or
a list of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline malfunctioning and may require immediate service.
Retailers. Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance.
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should be
as octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of
avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum and
these products contain high concentrations of metha-
varnish removal may contain active solvents or similar
nol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance
ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket and dia-
problems resulting from the use of such fuels or
phragm materials.
additives is not the responsibility of the manufac-
turer and may void or not be covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control ADDING FUEL
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the left
you. side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure
Carbon Monoxide Warnings the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle.
1. Open the fuel filler door.
WARNING!
2. Remove the fuel cap by rotating it counterclockwise.
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon mon-
oxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle
is stopped in an open area with the engine running
for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation
system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main-
tenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
Fuel Filler Cap
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal condi-
tions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with 3. Fully insert the gasoline nozzle into the filler pipe.
all side windows fully open. 4. Fill the vehicle with fuel.
NOTE: When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel
tank is full.
5. Remove gasoline nozzle, reinstall fuel cap and close fuel NOTE:
filler door. • When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank
is full.
WARNING!
• Tighten the fuel filler cap until you hear a “clicking”
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the sound. This is an indication that the fuel filler cap is
vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is properly tightened.
being filled.
• If the gas cap is not tightened properly, the MIL may 5
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
come on. Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time the
in violation of most state and federal fire regulations
vehicle is refueled.
and may cause the MIL to turn on.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable VEHICLE LOADING
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be burned.
Always place gas containers on the ground while filling. As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis-
tration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label
affixed to the driver’s side door or B-Pillar.
CAUTION!
If seats are removed for carrying cargo, do not exceed the
• Damage to the fuel system or emissions control system specified GVWR and GAWR.
could result from using an improper fuel tank filler
tube cap. A poorly fitting cap could let impurities into Vehicle Certification Label
the fuel system and may cause the “Malfunction Indi- Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to the
cator Light (MIL)” to turn on, due to fuel vapors
drivers side B-Pillar or the rear of the driver’s door.
escaping from the system.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top The label contains the following information:
off” the fuel tank after filling. • Name of manufacturer
• Month and year of manufacture
• Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
WARNING!
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front
Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is impor-
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear tant that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can result if
either rating is exceeded. You could lose control of the
• Type of vehicle
vehicle and have a collision.
• Month, Day, and Hour of manufacture (MDH)
Tire Size
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN.
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires must
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total load Rim Size
must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR.
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) listed.
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear Inflation Pressure
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
rear GAWR. all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Curb Weight Loading
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Store heavier items
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo loaded down low and be sure you distribute their weight as
into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight values are evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before
determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you
scale before any occupants or cargo are added. have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within
the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight. 5
Overloading
Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect on
The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires, wheels, the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the
etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as brakes operate.
long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the front and
rear GAWR. NOTE: Refer to the “Vehicle Certification Label” affixed to
the rear of the driver’s door for your vehicle’s GVWR and
The best way to figure out the total weight of your vehicle GAWRs.
is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for
operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that it TRAILER TOWING
is not over the GVWR. In this section you will find safety tips and information on
Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with
separately. It is important that you distribute the load your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully review this
evenly over the front and rear axles. information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as
possible.
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and
shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage,
components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s follow the requirements and recommendations in this
GVWR. manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
Common Towing Definitions rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certifica-
tion Label” in “Starting And Operating” for further infor-
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
mation.
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) WARNING!
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue weight. front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed can result if either rating is exceeded.
the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification
Label” in “Starting And Operating” for further informa- Tongue Weight (TW)
tion.
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) hitch ball by the trailer. You must consider this as part of
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all the load on your vehicle.
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or tempo- Frontal Area
rary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and ready for
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
operation⬙ condition.
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
Trailer Sway Control
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of
the trailer must be supported by the scale. The trailer sway control is supported by a mechanical
telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
receiver and the trailer tongue that typically provides
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or traveling.
If equipped, the electronic Trailer Sway Control (TSC) thereby enhancing towing safety. The addition of a friction/
recognizes a swaying trailer and automatically applies hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic
individual wheel brakes and/or reduces engine power to and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and
attempt to eliminate the trailer sway. trailer stability. Trailer sway control and a weight distributing
(load equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Weight-Carrying Hitch
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle and
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight, trailer configuration/loading to comply with Gross Axle
just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
5
other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds of
hitches are the most popular on the market today and they WARNING!
are commonly used to tow small and medium sized
trailers. • An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking per-
Weight-Distributing Hitch formance, and could result in a collision.
A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage • Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible
through spring (load) bars. They are typically used for heavier with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your hitch
loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle’s and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational
front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in accordance Vehicle dealer for additional information.
with the manufacturer’s directions, it provides for a more level
ride, offering more consistent steering and brake control
Trailer Hitch Classification and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct
trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
The following chart provides the industry standard for the
maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lbs (1,587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2,267 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lbs (4,535 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight
(GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Trailer And Tongue Weight
Ratings) Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
NOTE: For additional trailer towing information (maxi- your bumper or trailer hitch.
mum trailer weight ratings) refer to the following website
addresses:
• ramtrucks.com/en/towing_guide/
• ramtruck.ca (Canada)
• rambodybuilder.com
Refer to the “Tire And Loading Information” placard for
the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for
your vehicle.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain
components, the following guidelines are recommended.
5
CAUTION!
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
or other parts could be damaged.
Consider the following items when computing the weight • Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a trailer
on the rear axle of the vehicle: is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and do
• The tongue weight of the trailer. not make starts at full throttle. This helps the engine
and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put
loads.
in or on your vehicle.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers. Perform the maintenance listed in the “Maintenance
Schedule”. Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
maintenance intervals. When towing a trailer, never exceed
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
the GAWR or GCWR ratings.
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.

Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these PARK. For four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure the
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as transfer case is not in NEUTRAL (N). Always block
possible: or ⴖchockⴖ the trailer wheels.
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer • GCWR must not be exceeded.
and will not shift during travel. When trailering • Total weight must be distributed between the tow
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to ratings are not exceeded:
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and 1. GVWR
have a collision.
2. GTW
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can 3. GAWR
cause a loss of control, poor performance or damage 4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized.
to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, sus-
pension, chassis structure or tires. Towing Requirements — Tires
• Safety chains must always be used between your • Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the spare tire.
hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the chains
under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for • Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
turning corners. and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a “Tires – General Information” in “Starting And Operat-
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on the ing” for proper tire inflation procedures.
tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in • Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures
before trailer usage.
(Continued)
• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before
WARNING!
towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General Information”
in “Starting And Operating” for the proper inspection • Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hy-
procedure. draulic brake lines. It can overload your brake sys-
• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Informa- tem and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes
tion” in “Starting And Operating” for the proper tire when you need them and could have a collision.
replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher • Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis-
load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s tance. When towing you should allow for additional 5
GVWR and GAWR limits. space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front
of you. Failure to do so could result in a collision.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
• Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or CAUTION!
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible per- If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
sonal injury. loaded, it should have its own brakes and they should
be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this could lead to
• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal
required when towing a trailer with electronically actu- effort, and longer stopping distances.
ated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with a
hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And Wiring
brake controller is not required.
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
1,000 lbs (453 kg) and required for trailers in excess of motoring safety.
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and seven-pin NOTE:
wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and • Disconnect trailer wiring connector from the vehicle
connector. before launching a boat (or any other device plugged
into vehicle’s electrical connect) into water.
• Be sure to reconnect after clear from water area.
Trailer Electrical Connector Location

1 — Four-Pin Connector Location
2 — Seven-Pin Connector Location
Four-Pin Connector
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s wiring
harness. 1 — Female Pins 4 — Park
2 — Male Pin 5 — Left Stop/Turn
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle 3 — Ground 6 — Right Stop/Turn
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector. Refer
to the following illustrations.
Automatic Transmission
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. The
transmission controls include a drive strategy to avoid
frequent shifting when towing. However, if frequent shift-
ing does occur while in DRIVE, use the Electronic Range
Select (ERS) shift control to select a lower gear range.
NOTE: Using a lower gear range while operating the
5
vehicle under heavy loading conditions will improve per-
formance and extend transmission life by reducing exces-
sive shifting and heat build up. This action will also
provide better engine braking.
Seven-Pin Connector Electronic Range Select (ERS)
1 — Battery 5 — Ground • When using the ERS shift control, select the highest gear
2 — Backup Lamps 6 — Left Stop/Turn
that allows for adequate performance and avoids fre-
3 — Right Stop/Turn 7 — Running Lamps
4 — Electric Brakes quent downshifts. For example, choose “5” if the desired
speed can be maintained. Choose “4” or “3” if needed to
Towing Tips maintain the desired speed.
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping, and • To prevent excess heat generation, avoid continuous
backing up the trailer in an area located away from heavy driving at high RPM. Reduce vehicle speed as necessary
traffic. to avoid extended driving at high RPM. Return to a
higher gear range or vehicle speed when grade and road
conditions allow.
Speed Control — If Equipped City Driving
• Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads. When stopped for short periods, shift the transmission into
• When using the speed control, if you experience speed NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until Highway Driving
you can get back to cruising speed.
Reduce speed.
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency. Air Conditioning
Cooling System Turn off temporarily.

To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheat-
ing, take the following actions:
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground Automatic Transmission

Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow Front OK
Rear NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK
NOTE: When towing your vehicle, always follow appli-
cable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provin-
cial Highway Safety offices for additional details.
Recreational Towing — Automatic Transmission
CAUTION!
Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the front wheels
are OFF the ground. This may be accomplished using a tow • DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drive-
dolly or vehicle trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow this train will result. If this vehicle requires towing,
procedure: make sure the drive wheels are OFF the ground.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following ments can cause severe transmission damage. Dam-
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions. age from improper towing is not covered under the 5
2. Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly. New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Place the transmission

in PARK.
4. Properly secure the front wheels to the dolly, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
5. Release the parking brake.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . . .252 ▫ Vehicles With Alloy Wheels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . .252 ▫ Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers . . . . . . . .271
䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . .253 䡵 JUMP STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . .272
▫ Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253 ▫ Preparations For Jump Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272 6
䡵 TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . .255 ▫ Jump Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273

▫ Tire Service Kit Storage — If Equipped . . . . . . .255 䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
▫ Tire Service Kit Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255 䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . .276
䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING — IF 䡵 GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
䡵 IGNITION KEY REMOVAL OVERRIDE . . . . . . . .278
▫ Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259
䡵 ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
▫ Removing The Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259 (EARS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279
▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263 䡵 EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . .279
▫ Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263
252 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
instrument panel above the climate controls. potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning • On the highways — slow down.
flasher. When the switch is activated, all directional • In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission in
turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic NEUTRAL, but do not increase the engine idle speed
of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to turn off while preventing vehicle motion with the brakes.
the Hazard Warning flashers.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down an
This is an emergency warning system and it should not be impending overheat condition:
used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for • If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
other motorists.
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control to
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
high. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the
may wear down your battery. engine cooling system.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 253
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
WARNING!
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure that
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any time a
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the vehicle, the
see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a properly cali-
open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool. brated torque wrench using a six sided (hex) deep wall
Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when socket.
the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
Torque Specifications
CAUTION! 6
Lug Nut/Bolt Torque **Lug Nut/ Lug Nut/
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your Bolt Size Bolt Socket
vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads HOT (H), pull Size
over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air 63 Ft-Lbs (86 N·m) M12 x 1.25 17 mm
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back Steel Wheels Only
into the normal range. If the pointer remains on HOT 89 Ft-Lbs (120 N·m)
(H), and you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine Aluminum Wheels
off immediately and call for service. Only
**Use only your authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/
bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting the
tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
Torque Patterns
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
Wheel Mounting Surface sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated against
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each the wheel.
nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been
lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in
personal injury.
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED
Small punctures up to ¼” (6 mm) in the tire tread can be
sealed with Tire Service Kit. Foreign objects (e.g., screws or
nails) should not be removed from the tire. Tire Service Kit
can be used in outside temperatures down to approxi-
mately -4°F (-20°C).
This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you to
drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a
maximum speed of 65 mph (106 km/h). 6
Tire Service Kit Storage — If Equipped
The Tire Service Kit is located under the passenger seat. Tire Service Kit Components
Tire Service Kit Usage 1 — Sealant Bottle
2 — Pressure Gauge
If a tire is punctured, you can make a first emergency repair
3 — Power Plug (Located Behind Storage Door)
using the Tire Service Kit located under the passenger seat. 4 — Power Button
Tire punctures of up to 1/4” (6 mm) can be repaired; the kit 5 — Sealant Hose (Clear)
can be used in all weather conditions. Do not remove the
foreign object from the punctured tire, i.e., screw or nail. WARNING!
Remove the Tire Service Kit from the vehicle, take it out
• Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the vehicle
from the bag and place it near the punctured tire. Screw the
closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid
clear flexible filling tube to the tire valve.
the danger of being hit when using the Tire Service Kit.
(Continued)

• Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle under • Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service Kit
the following circumstances: to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing. Tire
• If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled, swallowed,
1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger. or absorbed through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and
• If the tire has any sidewall damage. respiratory irritation. Flush immediately with plenty
• If the tire has any damage from driving with of water if there is any contact with eyes or skin.
extremely low tire pressure. Change clothing as soon as possible, if there is any
• If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat contact with clothing.
tire. • Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In
• If the wheel has any damage. case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a physi-
• If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or the cian immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of reach
wheel. of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately
• Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or heat with plenty of water and drink plenty of water. Do
sources. not induce vomiting! Consult a physician immedi-
• A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a collision ately.
or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the
vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in the place Insert the power plug into the vehicle power outlet socket.
provided. Failure to follow these warnings can result Start the vehicle engine.
in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your Push the Tire Service Kit power button to the “I” position.
passengers, and others around you. The electric compressor will be turned on, sealant and air
will inflate the tire.
(Continued)
Minimum 26 psi (1.8 bar) of pressure should be reached If the pressure is at 19 psi (1.3 bar) or above repeat the
within 20 minutes. If the pressure has not been reached, inflation process to reach the correct tire pressure and
turn off and remove the Tire Service Kit, drive the vehicle continue driving.
30 feet (10 meters) back and forth, to better distribute the
Peel off the warning label from the bottle and place it on
sealant inside the tire.
the dashboard as a reminder to the driver that a tire has
Attach the clear flexible filling tube of the compressor been treated with Tire Service Kit.
directly to the tire valve and repeat the inflation process.
When the correct pressure has been reached, start driving WARNING!
the vehicle to uniformly distribute the sealant inside the The metal end fitting from Power Plug may get hot 6
tire. After 10 minutes, stop and check the tire pressure. If after use, so it should be handled carefully.
the pressure is below 19 psi (1.3 bar), do not drive the
vehicle, as the tire is too damaged, contact the nearest NOTE: Replace the sealant canister prior to the expiration
authorized dealer. date at your authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair. Have
the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after using
Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 65 mph (110 km/h) until
the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this
warning can result in injuries that are serious or fatal
to you, your passengers, and others around you. Have
the tire checked as soon as possible at an authorized
dealer.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING — IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
Tire Service Kit Expiration Date Location
where it can be raised on a lift.
WARNING! • Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on
a jack.
Store the sealant canister in its special compartment, • The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing
away from sources of heat. Failure to follow this tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
WARNING may result in sealant canister rupture and vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be
serious injury or death. jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
Jack Location
The jack and tools are stowed under the driver’s front seat.
Jack Tools
1 — Wrench Handle
Jack/Tools Location 2 — Winch Extension
3 — Emergency Screwdriver
Removing The Spare Tire 4 — Bolt Install Wrench
5 — Wheel Chock
1. Remove the spare tire before attempting to jack up the 6 — Jack
vehicle. Attach the wrench handle to the winch exten-
sion.
2. To access the winch mechanism open the rear doors of
the vehicle to expose the winch mechanism access cover.
Remove the access cover and install the winch extension
into the winch mechanism.
Jack Tools
1 — Winch Extension
2 — Wrench Handle
Winch Location 3. Rotate the wheel wrench handle counterclockwise until

the spare tire is on the ground with enough cable slack
to allow you to pull it out from under the vehicle.
NOTE: The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
winch extension only. Use of an air wrench or other power
tools is not recommended and can damage the winch.
4. Pull the spare tire out from under the vehicle to gain 5. Remove the retainer nut prior to removing the retainer
access to the spare tire retainer. from the wheel.
Spare Tire Retainer Nut

6. Lift the spare tire with one hand to give clearance to tilt 7. Pull the retainer through the center of the wheel.
the retainer at the end of the cable.
Retainer
Lifting Spare Tire
Preparations For Jacking Jacking Instructions
1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or slippery
WARNING!
areas. Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help
prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
WARNING! • Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle.
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off the
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher. 6
road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be
changing the wheel.
raised.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher. • Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
3. Apply the parking brake. REVERSE.
4. Place the gear selector into PARK. • Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
5. Turn the ignition off to the LOCK position. • Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
6. Chock both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally jack.
opposite of the jacking position. For example, if chang- • Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
ing the right front tire, chock the left rear wheel. you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in • Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
the vehicle when the vehicle is being lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
jacked.
(Continued)
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are securely
stowed, spares must be stowed with the valve stem
facing the ground.
• The stowed spare tire should always be checked for
security by pushing on it with your hand , at the
location under the rear bumper, behind the vehicle.
The spare tire should not move when fully secured
by the winch under the vehicle.
Jack Warning Label
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
NOTE: Place the jack underneath the jack engagement
location that is closest to the flat tire.
Jacking Locations
1. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug bolts with the
wrench handle by turning them to the left one turn Jack Engaged To Body Flange
while the wheel is still on the ground.
2. There are two jack engagement locations on each side of
the vehicle body.
Front Jacking Location Rear Jacking Location
WARNING!
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never get any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center where
it can be raised on a lift.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated.
3. Turn the handle on the jack screw to the right until the
jack head is properly engaged in the described location.
Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is
securely engaged.
6
Rear Jacking Location Engaged

4. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right
until the tire just clears the surface and enough clearance
is obtained to install the spare tire. Minimum tire lift
provides maximum stability.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the
Front Jacking Location Engaged vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and hurt
someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to
remove the tire.
5. Remove the wheel lug bolts. For vehicles with wheel
covers, remove the cover from the wheel by hand. Do
not pry the wheel cover off. Then pull the wheel off the
hub.
6. Install the spare tire. Lightly tighten the wheel lug bolts
using the bolt install wrench.
WARNING!
not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in serious injury. Mounting Spare Tire
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
7. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left.

8. Refer to “Torque Specifications” in this section for
proper wheel lug bolt torque.
9. Lower the jack to its fully-closed position.
Vehicles With Alloy Wheels
WARNING!
For stowing a damaged tire on vehicles with alloy wheels,
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or remove the adapter bracket and bolts from the storage bag
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. in the glove compartment and follow the steps below:
Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the
places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired 1. Take the adapter and fit the plastic spacer between the
or replaced immediately. spring and the flange of the bracket (The adapter
bracket is sold separately through the dealer).
10. Stow the cable and wheel spacer before driving the
vehicle. Refer to “Vehicles With Alloy Wheels” in this 6
section for instructions on stowing alloy wheels.
11. Stow the jack and tools under the driver’s seat.
12. Check the spare tire pressure as soon as possible.
Correct the tire pressure, as required.
13. When you place the spare tire back on the winch or if
you carry the tire in need of repair on the winch,
always check that the tire is properly secured under the
vehicle by pushing on the stowed tire under the rear
bumper at the back of the vehicle. If the tire has motion
when pushed, use the tools to retighten the winch until Adapter/Spacer
a loud click is heard. 1 — Adapter
2 — Plastic Spacer
2. The plastic fin must be directed downwards and per-
fectly coincide with the flange cut part; fit the bracket in
the adapter, fold the bracket up and secure it to the
adapter with the fastening knob.
Alloy Wheel Mounting

4. Tighten the bolts with the wrench handle.
5. Rotate the winch mechanism clockwise until the wheel
is properly stowed under the vehicle and until the
Adapter/Bracket
wench makes three audible noises.
1 — Adapter
2 — Fastening Knob 6. Reach underneath and shake tire by hand to confirm
that it is secure. The tire should not move. If the tire is
3. Position the tire vertically and lay the mounted adapter still loose and/or three audible noises are not heard,
on the inner part of the rim, using the supplied bolts place and secure damaged wheel into the vehicle and
fasten the wheel to the adapter using the bolt install seek dealer assistance for the winch mechanism.
wrench. This is for temporary use only.
Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers 3. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the valve
stem on the wheel. Install the cover by hand, snapping the
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
cover over the two wheel bolts. Do not use a hammer or
2. To ease the installation process for steel wheels with excessive force to install the cover.
wheel covers, install two wheel bolts on the wheel. 4. Install the remaining wheel bolts with the threaded end
Install the wheel bolts with the threaded end of the bolt of the wheel bolt toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the
toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the wheel bolts. wheel bolts.
WARNING!
6
not tighten the wheel bolts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
5. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack

handle counterclockwise.
6. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the
wrench while holding at the end of the handle for increased
Tire And Wheel Cover Or Center Cap leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern until each
wheel bolt has been tightened twice. Refer to “Torque
1 — Valve Stem 4 — Wheel Cover
2 — Valve Notch 5 — Road Wheel
Specifications” in this section for correct wheel bolt torque.
3 — Wheel Bolt 7. After 25 miles (40 km) check the wheel bolt torque with
a torque wrench to ensure that all wheel bolts are
properly seated against the wheel.
JUMP STARTING PROCEDURES NOTE: The positive battery post is covered with a protec-
tive cap. Lift up on the cap to gain access to the positive
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be jump
battery post.
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another
vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack. Jump
starting can be dangerous if done improperly, so please
follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack, follow
the manufacturer’s operating instructions and precautions.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen. It
could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other Positive Battery Post
booster source with a system voltage greater than
12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor, alter- WARNING!
nator or electrical system may occur.
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever
Preparations For Jump Start the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition
switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan
The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the blades.
engine compartment, behind the left headlight assembly.
(Continued)
Jump Starting Procedure
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch WARNING!
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured. Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your result in personal injury or property damage due to
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is battery explosion.
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery. CAUTION!
6
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the automatic transmis- Failure to follow these procedures could result in
sion into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK. damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical or the discharged vehicle.
accessories. Connecting The Jumper Cables
3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park 1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
WARNING! cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could 3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to the
establish a ground connection and personal injury negative (-) post of the booster battery.
could result.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper 3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable from
cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
the discharged vehicle’s engine) away from the battery
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
and the fuel injection system.
cable from the positive (+) post of the vehicle with the
discharged battery.
WARNING!
If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post you should have the battery and charging system in-
of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark spected at your authorized dealer.
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury. Only use the specific ground point, do FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
not use any other exposed metal parts. If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it can
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the steering
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start wheel right and left to clear the area around the front
the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery. wheels. Push and hold the lock button on the gear selector.
Then shift back and forth between DRIVE and REVERSE,
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in while gently pressing the accelerator. Use the least amount
the reverse sequence: of accelerator pedal pressure that will maintain the rocking
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables motion, without spinning the wheels or racing the engine.
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable from NOTE: Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be
the engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less.
battery. Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL for more
than two seconds, you must press the brake pedal to
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper engage DRIVE or REVERSE.
cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
CAUTION! WARNING! (Continued)

Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could explode and
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the en- injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels
gine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30
least one minute after every five rocking-motion seconds continuously without stopping when you are
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce the stuck. And do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no
risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts to matter what the speed.
free a stuck vehicle.
CAUTION! 6
NOTE: Push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch, to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙ mode, before • When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between
rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster
System” in “Starting And Operating” for further informa- than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may
tion. Once the vehicle has been freed, push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ result.
switch again to restore ⬙ESC On⬙ mode. • Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure. It
WARNING! can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmis-
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated sion shifting occurring).
by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or even
(Continued)
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
vehicle using a commercial towing service.
Towing Condition Wheel OFF The Ground ALL MODELS

Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow Rear NOT ALLOWED
Front OK
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent for instructions on shifting the transmission out of PARK
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other for towing.
equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment
manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is man- CAUTION!
datory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main
structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers or • Do not use sling-type equipment when towing. Ve-
associated brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles hicle damage may occur.
under tow must be observed. • When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not
attach to front or rear suspension components. Dam-
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.) age to your vehicle may result from improper towing.
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
mode. The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If the ignition key is unavailable, or the vehicle’s battery is
discharged, refer to “Gear Selector Override” in this section
If flatbed equipment is not available, this vehicle must be
towed with the front wheels OFF the ground (using a
towing dolly, or wheel lift equipment with the front wheels
raised).
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe transmission damage. Damage
from improper towing is not covered under the New 6
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE

Gear Selector Boot Location
If a malfunction occurs and the gear selector cannot be 4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
moved out of the PARK position, you can use the following
procedure to temporarily move the gear selector: 5. Insert a small screwdriver or a similar tool into the gear
selector override access hole (at the right front corner of
1. Turn the engine OFF. the gear selector assembly), then push and hold the
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. override release lever down. While holding the override
release lever down, push the lock button on the gear
3. Using a screwdriver or similar tool, carefully separate selector and move the gear selector to the NEUTRAL
the gear selector boot from the center console. position.
2. Remove the Allen Key located in the rear cargo area, in
the tool bag (if equipped) or on the left side in the cargo
box.
3. Unlock the steering column, pull the tilt/telescoping
control handle down.
4. Pull the steering wheel outward until it is in the end of
the travel position, then lock the steering column in
position, push the control handle up until fully engaged.
5. Using the Allen key, undo the lower steering column
cover screws, and remove the lower cover.
Gear Selector Override Access Hole

6. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
7. Reinstall the gear selector boot.
IGNITION KEY REMOVAL OVERRIDE

This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock
which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the
ignition switch can be turned to the LOCK/OFF (key
removal) position. To remove the key manually, proceed as
follows:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake. Lower Steering Column Screw Locations
6. Pull the release tab downwards using one hand and ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
with the other one remove the key, sliding it outwards. (EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident
Response System.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Things To
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information
on the Enhanced Accident Response System (EARS) func-
tion.
6
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
Release Tab Location deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist
7. Once the key is removed, reinstall the steering column cover. in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Things To
CAUTION! Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information
on the Event Data Recorder (EDR).
It is advisable to contact your authorized dealer to have
the reinstall procedure carried out. If you would like to
proceed in performing the reinstall procedure special
attention must be paid to the correct coupling of the
clips. Otherwise damage to the cover or noise might be
heard due to incorrect fastening of the lower cover.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L . . . . . . . . . . .283 ▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . . .284 ▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
▫ Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) ▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294
Cybersecurity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296 7
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300
PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
▫ Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
䡵 DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
䡵 FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
▫ Underhood Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
▫ Interior Fuses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
▫ Central Unit Fuse Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
282 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 VEHICLE STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316 䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316 䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS .322
䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317 ▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
▫ Exterior Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317 ▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
▫ Interior Bulbs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 283
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L
1 — Air Cleaner Filter 5 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)

2 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 6 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
3 — Oil Fill Cap 7 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 8 — Engine Oil Dipstick
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard Diag- Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard Diagnostic
nostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the perfor- system (OBD II) and a connection port to allow access to
mance of the emissions, engine, and automatic transmission information related to the performance of your emissions
control systems. When these systems are operating properly, controls. Authorized service technicians may need to ac-
your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel cess this information to assist with the diagnosis and
economy, as well as engine emissions well within current service of your vehicle and emissions system.
government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system will WARNING!
turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” It will also
• ONLY an authorized service technician should con-
store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your
service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle nect equipment to the OBD II connection port in
will usually be drivable and not need towing, see your order to diagnose or service your vehicle.
authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. • If unauthorized equipment is connected to the OBD
II connection port, such as a driver-behavior tracking
CAUTION! device, it may:
• Be possible that vehicle systems, including safety
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause related systems, could be impaired or a loss of
further damage to the emission control system. It vehicle control could occur that may result in an
could also affect fuel economy and driveability. The accident involving serious injury or death.
vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests • Access, or allow others to access, information
can be performed. stored in your vehicle systems, including personal
• If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running, information.
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required. For further information, refer to “Cybersecurity” in the
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” section.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler
serviced, or recently had a dead battery or a battery
cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a “Check fuel
replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined
cap” message will be displayed in the instrument cluster
not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in ”Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information. Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which you
Tighten the gas cap until a ⬙clicking⬙ sound is heard. This is an can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your
indication that the gas cap is properly tightened. vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the follow-
Push the odometer reset button to turn the message off. If the ing:
problem persists, the message will appear the next time the 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON mode, but do not crank or
vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged cap. If the start the engine. 7
problem is detected twice in a row, the system will turn on the
MIL. Resolving the problem will turn the MIL light off. NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE 2. As soon as you cycle the ignition to the ON mode, you
PROGRAMS will see the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” symbol
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an come on as part of a normal bulb check.
inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
happen:
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte- • The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction to being fully illuminated until you cycle the ignition
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not on OFF or start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s
when the engine is running, and that the OBD II system is OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed
ready for testing. to the I/M station.
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully DEALER SERVICE
illuminated until you place the ignition in the off posi- Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel,
tion or start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s special tools, and equipment to perform all service opera-
OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I/M tions in an expert manner. Service Manuals are available
station. which include detailed service information for your ve-
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your hicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was procedure yourself.
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control sys-
you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle tems may void your warranty and could result in civil
as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to penalties being assessed against you.
update. A recheck with the above test routine may then
indicate that the system is now ready.
WARNING!
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready
or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle You can be badly injured working on or around a
operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail your vehicle have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you
because the MIL is on with the engine running. have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
Use of genuine Mopar parts for normal/scheduled main-
tenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
designed performance. Damage or failures caused by the services determined by the engineers who designed your
use of non-Mopar parts for maintenance and repairs will vehicle.
not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed Engine Oil
“Maintenance Schedule”, there are other components
Checking Oil Level
which may require servicing or replacement in the future.
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must be
CAUTION! maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every month. The best time to
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully
repairs and service when necessary could result in warmed up engine is shut off.
more costly repairs, damage to other components or
negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
have potential malfunctions examined by an autho- improve the accuracy of the oil level readings.
rized dealer or qualified repair center. There are three possible dipstick types, 7
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
• Crosshatched zone.
that protect the performance and durability of your
vehicle and also allow extended maintenance inter- • Crosshatched zone marked SAFE.
vals. Do not use chemical flushes in these compo- • Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the low end of
nents as the chemicals can damage your engine, the range and MAX at the high end of the range.
transmission or air conditioning. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a NOTE: Always maintain the oil level within the crosshatch
flush is needed because of component malfunction, markings on the dipstick.
use only the specified fluid for the flushing proce- Adding 1 quart (1.0 liters) of oil when the reading is at the
dure. low end of the dipstick range will raise the oil level to the
high end of the range marking.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
CAUTION!
Identification Symbol
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage your This symbol means that the oil has been
engine. certified by the American Petroleum In-
stitute (API). The manufacturer only rec-
Change Engine Oil
ommends API Certified engine oils.
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further informa-
tion. This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20, 0W-30, 5W-30 and
10W-30 engine oils.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or 350 CAUTION!
hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350
hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
for fleet customers. chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 2.4L Engine
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only rec- Mopar SAE 0W-20 engine oil approved to FCA Material
ommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix or equiva-
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395. lent is recommended for all operating temperatures. This
engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle
fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compart- oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
ment” in this section. indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certifi- environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service sta-
cation mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number tion or governmental agency for advice on how and where
should not be used. used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.
Synthetic Engine Oils Engine Oil Filter
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom- The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom- every engine oil change. 7
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are Engine Oil Filter Selection
followed.
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type dispos-
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the engine oil able oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The
certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only
number should not be used. high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
Materials Added To Engine Oil service. Mopar engine oil filters are high quality oil filters
and are recommended.
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addi-
tion of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to the
engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Maintenance-Free Battery
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper main- Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
tenance intervals. You will never have to add water, nor is periodic mainte-
nance required.
NOTE: Be sure to follow the “Severe Duty Conditions”
maintenance interval if applicable.
WARNING!
WARNING! • Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean over
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
a battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
large amounts of water. Refer to “Jump-Starting
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for
near the engine compartment before starting the ve-
further information.
hicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame
etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in serious
or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a booster
personal injury.
battery or any other booster source with an output
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to
touch each other.
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies • Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories con-
considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to tain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after
assure most efficient service. Mopar engine air cleaner handling.
filters are a high quality filter and are recommended.
CAUTION! WARNING!
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the • Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants ap-
battery that the positive cable is attached to the proved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning
positive post and the negative cable is attached to the system. Some unapproved refrigerants are flam-
negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+) mable and can explode, injuring you. Other unap-
and negative (-) and are identified on the battery proved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the sys-
case. Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal tem to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
posts and free of corrosion. Warranty Information Book for further warranty
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the information.
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before • The air conditioning system contains refrigerant un-
connecting the charger to the battery. Do not use a der high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury or 7
“fast charger” to provide starting voltage. damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any
repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be
Air Conditioner Maintenance done by an experienced technician.
For best possible performance, your air conditioner should
be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the CAUTION!
start of each warm season. This service should include
cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test. Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time. system as the chemicals can damage your air condition-
ing components. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R134a — If Body Lubrication
Equipped Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro- seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
carbon (HFC) that is an ozone-saving product. However, tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be
the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning ser- lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as
vice be performed by authorized dealer or other service Mopar Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy operation
facilities using recovery and recycling equipment. and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the applica-
tion of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be wiped
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG
clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating excess oil
compressor oil and refrigerants.
and grease should be removed. Particular attention should
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R1234yf — If also be given to hood latching components to ensure
Equipped proper function. When performing other underhood ser-
R-1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoole- vices, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch
fine HFO that is an ozone-saving product with a low GWP should be cleaned and lubricated.
(Global Warming Potential). However, the manufacturer The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
recommends that air conditioning service be performed by year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
authorized dealer or other service facilities using recovery amount of a high quality lubricant, such as Mopar Lock
and recycling equipment. Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
Windshield Wiper Blades 2. Turn the ignition to the MAR-ON position then to STOP.
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the 3. After turning the ignition to the STOP, within two
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a minutes move the right stalk upward, into the unstable
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations (“anti-panic”) position, for at least half of a second. The
of salt or road film. windshield wiper then executes part of a stroke; at each
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may command, approximately 1/3 of a normal wiper stroke
cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use washer is triggered.
fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a NOTE: The previous operation can be repeated up to three
dry windshield. times. In order to move the blades to the most suitable
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from position.
7
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with 4. Lift the blade from the windshield and proceed with the
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc. required operation.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending 5. Carefully lower the blade, bringing it back in contact
on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor perfor- with the windshield.
mance of blades may be present with chattering, marks,
water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are 6. Bring the blade to the initial rest position, turning the
present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary. ignition to MAR-ON.
Wiper Service Position NOTE: Do not operate the screen wiper with the blades
lifted from the windshield.
If it is necessary to lift the blade from the windshield (In the
event of snow or blade replacement) Proceed as directed:
1. Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the OFF
position.
Adding Washer Fluid Exhaust System
The fluid reservoir is located in the front of the engine The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the
compartment. Be sure to check the fluid level in the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with wind- system.
shield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and operate
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
water. or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex-
washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe clean haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
the wiper blades, this will help blade performance. aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or
loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system in
the passenger compartment. In addition, have the exhaust
cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
system inspected each time the vehicle is raised for lubri-
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating
cation or oil change. Replace as required.
information can be found on most washer fluid containers.
WARNING! WARNING!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breath-
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
ing it can make you unconscious and can eventually
must be exercised when filling or working around the
poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer to “Safety
washer solution.
Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things To Know Before Starting
Your Vehicle” for further information.
(Continued)
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter
will not require maintenance. However, it is important to
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst
materials that can burn. Such materials might be operation and prevent possible catalyst damage.
grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust
system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control sys-
where your exhaust system can contact anything that tems can result in civil penalties being assessed against
can burn. you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
CAUTION! engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe and
abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop the
• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Service, 7
fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effective- including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications,
ness of the catalyst as an emissions control device should be obtained immediately.
and may seriously reduce engine performance and
cause serious damage to the engine. To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your • Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involv- motion.
ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor- • Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
mance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Contin- vehicle.
ued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat, • Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
resulting in possible damage to the converter and disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
vehicle. testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough idle
or malfunctioning operating conditions.
Cooling System Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
WARNING! properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you be added to the system, please contact your local autho-
see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not rized dealer.
open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool. If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains visible
Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and flush with
the radiator or coolant bottle is hot. OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to MS.90032).
Engine Coolant Checks Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper main-
tenance intervals.
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where appli- Selection Of Coolant
cable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the system
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “Main-
should be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT
taining Your Vehicle” for further information.
coolant (conforming to MS.90032) by an authorized dealer.
Check the front of the A/C condenser for any accumulation of
CAUTION!
bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from
a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser. • Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber, specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en-
cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at the gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine dam-
coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire age and may decrease corrosion protection. Organic
system for leaks. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT
(Continued)
PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Adding Coolant
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is differ- Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
ent and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that allows
Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (anti- extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (anti-
freeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000 miles
freeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this
introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, extended maintenance period, it is important that you use
the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed, the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to
and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.
MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as pos- Please review these recommendations for using Organic
sible. Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) 7
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
• We recommend using Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10
be compatible with the engine coolant and may plug
Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
the radiator.
Technology) that meets the requirements of FCA Mate-
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
rial Standard MS.90032.
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (anti- • Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
freeze) is not recommended. that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentrations
(not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F (−37°C)
are anticipated. Please contact your authorized dealer
for assistance.
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized Cooling System Pressure Cap
water when mixing the water/engine coolant (anti- The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
freeze) solution. The use of lower quality water will coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine (antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
cooling system. recovery tank.
NOTE: The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
• It is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
level of protection against freezing according to the
The image on the coolant system pres-
temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is
sure cap is a reminder that the radiator
operated.
contains hot engine coolant under pres-
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant prop- sure.
erly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to
severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed
to be added to the system, please contact your local
authorized dealer. WARNING!
• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recom- • Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add
mended and can result in cooling system damage. If engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is over-
HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency, heated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an
have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to build up
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as pos- in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury,
sible. do not remove the pressure cap while the system is
hot or under pressure.
(Continued)
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator/coolant pressure cap
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one speci- unless checking for engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point
fied for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine or replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant of this.
damage may result. As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory,
the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month.
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is a
maintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that meets the
regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check with
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032 should
your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for
be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or
children, do not store ethylene glycol-based engine coolant Points To Remember 7
in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek emergency
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
assistance immediately. Clean up any ground spills imme-
from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally
diately.
a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high humidity
Coolant Level accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when
The coolant expansion bottle provides a quick visual the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine coolant (anti-
method for determining that the coolant level is adequate. freeze) to enter the radiator.
With the engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine
coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the
“MIN” and “MAX” marks.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no • Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate. the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle. unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance,
poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the
coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze) Brake System
needs to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
bottle must also be protected against freezing. system components should be inspected periodically. Refer
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested intervals.
for leaks.
WARNING!
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possi-
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion pro- bly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding
tection of your engine which contains aluminum com- on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake
ponents. temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible
• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow brake damage. You would not have your full braking
hoses are not kinked or obstructed. capacity in an emergency.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is

equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid in the master cylinder should be checked when vehicle is also identified on the original factory
performing under hood services or immediately if the installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
“Brake Warning Light” is illuminated. • To avoid contamination from foreign matter or mois-
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before ture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been
removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the fluid in a tightly closed container. Keep the master cylin-
level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid der reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in
reservoir. With disc brakes, fluid level can be expected to a open container absorbs moisture from the air
fall as the brake pads wear. Brake fluid level should be resulting in a lower boiling point. This may cause it
checked when pads are replaced. However, low fluid level to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged brak-
may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed. ing, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could 7
result in a collision.
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer • Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “Maintain- spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing the
ing Your Vehicle” for further information. brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage
painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to
WARNING! avoid its contact with these surfaces.
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. • Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely This could result in a collision.
damage your brake system and/or impair its perfor-
mance. The proper type of brake fluid for your
(Continued)
Power Steering Fluid Automatic Transmission
Check the fluid level with the vehicle on flat ground and Selection Of Lubricant
engine cold. Fluid should be between MIN and MAX
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
references on the reservoir body.
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
The level may go over the MAX line when oil is hot. only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid. Refer
If topping off is required, make sure the oil you use is to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in this section
approved. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts” for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain the
in the section for further information. transmission fluid at the correct level using the recom-
mended fluid.
WARNING! NOTE: No chemical flushes should be used in any trans-
mission; only the approved lubricant should be used.
Because it is flammable, do not allow the power
steering fluid to come into contact with hot engine
parts
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufactur-
NOTE: Power steering fluid consumption is very low. If er’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in
you need to top off your fluid often and multiple times transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
have your system inspected by your authorized dealer. shudder. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine
Parts” in this section for fluid specifications.
Special Additives If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction,
visit your authorized dealer immediately to have the
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any
transmission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle
special additives in the transmission. Automatic Transmis-
with an improper fluid level can cause severe transmission
sion Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and its perfor-
damage.
mance may be impaired by supplemental additives. There-
fore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission.
Avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely CAUTION!
affect seals. If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your autho-
rized dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage
CAUTION! may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper tools
to adjust the fluid level accurately. 7
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission compo- Fluid And Filter Changes
nents. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the life
Fluid Level Check of the vehicle.
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. However,
adjustment under normal operating conditions. Routine change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes contami-
fluid level checks are not required, therefore the transmis- nated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is disas-
sion has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can check sembled for any reason.
your transmission fluid level using special service tools.
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion • Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion • Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic Washing
locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads passable in • Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle
snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road in the shade using Mopar Car Wash, or a mild car wash
surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal soap, and rinse the panels completely with clear water.
in your vehicle. Outside parking, which exposes your vehicle
to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on which the vehicle • If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated
is operated, extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme on your vehicle, use Mopar Super Kleen Bug and Tar
conditions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, Remover to remove.
and underbody protection. • Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar Cleaner
The following maintenance recommendations will enable Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect your
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resis- paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
tance built into your vehicle. • Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that
What Causes Corrosion? may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint CAUTION!

and protective coatings from your vehicle.
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such
The most common causes are: as steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation. metal and painted surfaces.
• Stone and gravel impact. • Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
Special Care Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads, or if you drive near All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once a chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using
month. mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same soap
the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and solution recommended for the body of the vehicle.
open. Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by salt,
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint, sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium chloride,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice or control
considered the responsibility of the owner. dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild soap
to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh chemicals or a 7
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s protective coating
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating, that helps keep them from corroding and tarnishing.
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost
of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the NOTE: Many aftermarket wheel cleaners contain strong
owner. acids or strong alkaline additives that can harm the wheel
surface.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
CAUTION!
packaged and sealed.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider mud Avoid products or automatic car washes that use acidic
or stone shields behind each wheel. solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh brushes.
Many aftermarket wheel cleaners and automatic car
• Use Mopar Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as washes may damage the wheel’s protective finish.
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle. (Continued)
NOTE: If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an
extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle cleaner, drive your vehicle for a few minutes before doing
Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel so. Driving the vehicle and applying the brakes when
Cleaner or equivalent is recommended. stopping will reduce the risk of brake rotor corrosion.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including excessive Dark Vapor Or Black Satin Chrome Wheels
brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire and
wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent dam- CAUTION!
age to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar
Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty
select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives, or
chrome wheels. Do not use any products on Dark Vapor or polishing compounds. They will permanently damage
Black Satin Chrome Wheels. They will permanently dam- this finish and such damage is not covered by the New
age this finish and such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY US-
Vehicle Limited Warranty. ING MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT
CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this is all that is
required to maintain this finish.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush, Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If
metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may Equipped
damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such damage is Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manner:
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with
Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equiva-
a clean, dry towel.
lent is recommended.
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
• For tough stains, apply Mopar Total Clean, or a mild ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery.
soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Application of a leather conditioner is not required to
Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue. maintain the original condition.
• For grease stains, apply Mopar Multi-Purpose Cleaner NOTE: Power washing is not allowed inside the vehicle
to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use a fresh, (both passenger and cargo area).
damp towel to remove soap residue.
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of WARNING!
protectants on Stain Repel products. Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Interior Care Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed
areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and 7
carpeting.
CAUTION!
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
• Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,
Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,
upholstery. painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately.
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can • Damage caused by these type of products may not be
act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn • Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Keton
soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as
Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your damage to the seat may result.
leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use
polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or
Cleaning Headlights Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
than glass headlights. must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore 1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may be
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed. used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reduc-
cloth.
ing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To remove road
dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing. 2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel Seat Belt Maintenance
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents
Glass Surfaces or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric. Sun
damage can also weaken the fabric.
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with
Mopar Glass Cleaner, or any commercial household-type glass If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the vehicle
cleaning the inside rear window equipped with electric defrost- to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
ers or windows equipped with radio antennas. Do not use
scrapers or other sharp instrument that may scratch the ele- Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
ments. buckles do not work properly.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the NOTE: If the belts retract slowly, inspect the upper turning
towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner loop for soiling. If soiling is present, clean with a wet soft
directly on the mirror. cloth until all residue is removed.

A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. fuse with metal wires or any other material. Failure
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not to use proper fuses may result in serious personal
disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt assemblies injury, fire and/or property damage.
must be replaced after a collision if they have been • Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition is
damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.). off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
FUSES • If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an autho-
rized dealer. 7
WARNING! • If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appro- (engine system, gearbox system) or steering system
priate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as blows, contact an authorized dealer.
(Continued)
Underhood Fuses The ID number of the electrical component corresponding
to each fuse can be found on the back of the cover.
The Front Distribution Unit is located on the right side of
the engine compartment, next to the battery. To access the
fuses, remove fasteners and remove the cover.
Front Distribution Unit

Cavity Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse Description
F01 60 Amp Blue – Body Controller
F02 40 Amp Orange – Rear Power Windows, Fog Lamps, Front Heated Seats
(If Equipped)
F02 30 Amp Green – Rear Power Windows, Front Heated Seats (If Equipped)
F02 30 Amp Green – Fog Lamps, Front Heated Seats (If Equipped)

F02 20 Amp Yellow – Front Heated Seats
F03 20 Amp Yellow – Ignition Switch
F04 40 Amp Orange – BSM System Module
F06 20 Amp Yellow – Radiator Fan - Low Speed
F07 50 Amp Red – Radiator Fan - High Speed
F08 40 Amp Orange – Blower Motor
F10 – 15 Amp Blue Horn
F11 – 10 Amp Red Secondary Loads ECM
F14 – 15 Amp Blue High Beam 7
F16 – 5 Amp Tan ECM and Transmission Shifter
F17 – 25 Amp Clear ECM Power Loads
F18 – 5 Amp Tan ECM Load, Main Relay
F19 – 7.5 Amp Brown Air Conditioning
F20 – 30 Amp Green Rear Defroster
F21 – 5 Amp Tan Key Unlock
F22 – 10 Amp Red Primary ECM Loads
F23 – 20 Amp Yellow BSM System
F24 – 5 Amp Tan BSM System, Positive Key and Steering Angle Sensor
F30 – 15 Amp Blue 2nd Instrument Panel Power Outlet
F83 20 Amp Yellow – Fuel Pump

F84 – 15 Amp Blue AT Module
F85 – 15 Amp Blue Rear Power Outlet 12V
F86 – 15 Amp Blue IP Power Outlet 12V
F87 – 5 Amp Tan IBS
F88 – 7.5 Amp Brown External Mirror Defrost
Interior Fuses
The interior fuse panel is part of the Body Control Module
(BCM) and is located on the driver’s side under the
instrument panel.
Fuse Panel Cover

Fuse Panel Cavity Locations

Cavity Mini Fuse Description
F53 5 Amp Beige KL 30 (+30) - IPC
F38 20 Amp Yellow Central Doors Locking
F36 10 Amp Red KL 30 (+30) - TPMS, EOBD, HVAC, Radio
F43 15 Amp Blue Bi-Directional Washer Pump

F48 20 Amp Yellow Passenger Power Windows
F50 7.5 Amp Brown KL 15 (+15) - Air-Bag
F51 7.5 Amp Brown KL 15 (+15) - External Mirror Adjustment Command, HVAC, RVC,
HWB Coils
F37 5 Amp Beige KL 15 (+15) - Brake Pedal Switch (N.O.), IPC, Brake Pedal Switch (N.C.)
F49 5 Amp Beige KL 15 (+15) - PAM, CSS Lighting, ECM Backlighting, TTM
F31 5 Amp Beige KL 15a (INT A) - HWB, MCO
F47 20 Amp Yellow Driver Power Windows
Central Unit Fuse Panel
The central power fuse panel is located on the driver’s side
under the instrument panel.
Fuse Panel Cover

7
Fuse Panel
F1 10 Amp Red Front Heated Seat Passenger
F2 10 Amp Red Front Heated Seat Driver
F3 20 Amp Yellow Rear Power Window Driver side
F4 20 Amp Yellow Rear Power Window Passenger side
F5 15 Amp Blue Fog Lamps
VEHICLE STORAGE • Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21 (e.g., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air condi-
days, you may want to take these steps to protect your tioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air
battery. and high blower setting. This will ensure adequate system
lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor dam-
• Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. age when the system is started again.
REPLACEMENT BULBS
Interior Bulbs
Lamps Bulb Number
Front Courtesy Lamps C10W
Rear Courtesy Lamps C10W
Luggage Lamp C5W
Exterior Bulbs
Lamps Bulb Number
Front Low Beam Headlamp H11
Front High Beam Headlamps HB3
Front Side Marker Lamps LED (See your authorized dealer)
Front Parking/Daytime Running Lamps W21W
Front Turn Signal Lamps WY21W
Rear Stop Lamp P21W
Rear Turn Signal Lamps PY21W
Lamps Bulb Number

Rear Tail Lamps P21/5W
Rear Side Marker Lamps LED (See your authorized dealer)
Center Mount Brake Lamp W5W
Reverse Light W16W
Front Fog Lamps H11
NOTE: Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from your authorized dealer.
If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit your authorized dealer or refer to the applicable Service Manual.
BULB REPLACEMENT Headlamps 7
NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric To change the bulb, proceed as follows:
conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric condi-
1. Remove the plastic cap from the back of the headlamp
tions change to allow the condensation to change back into
housing.
a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate the
clearing process. 2. Rotate the bulb counter-clockwise.
Exterior Bulbs 3. Remove the bulb and replace as needed.
NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric 4. Install the bulb and rotate clockwise to lock in place.
conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric condi-
5. Reinstall the plastic cap.
tions change to allow the condensation to change back into
a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate the
clearing process.
Front Turn Signal Lamps Front/Rear Side Marker Lamps
Front To change the bulb, proceed as follows:
To change the bulb, proceed as follows: The front/rear side marker lamps are LED and not ser-
viced separately. See your authorized dealer for replace-
1. Remove the cap from the back of the outer upper
ment of these lights.
headlamp housing.
Rear Tail, Stop, Backup And Turn Signal Lamps
2. Rotate the bulb counter clockwise and remove.
The rear light clusters contain taillight, brake light, direc-
3. Install the bulb into socket. tion indicator and reverse/rear fog light bulbs. To access
4. Rotate bulb/socket clockwise into lamp locking it in the light clusters, proceed as follows:
place. 1. Open the rear doors. or liftgate
5. Reinstall the plastic cap. 2. Remove the screws and remove the tail lamp assembly.
Parking And Daytime Running Lights
3. Remove the screws and separate the backplate from the
To change the bulb, proceed as follows: lamp housing.
1. Remove the cap from the back of the outer lower 4. Remove the tail, stop, or turn signal bulbs by pushing
headlamp housing. them slightly and turning counter-clockwise.
2. Rotate the bulb counter clockwise and remove. 5. Remove the backup lamp bulb by pulling straight out.
3. Install the bulb into socket, and rotate bulb/socket 6. Replace lamps as required and reinstall lamp.
clockwise into lamp locking it in place.
4. Reinstall the plastic cap.
The bulbs are arranged inside the light cluster as follows: Interior Bulbs
Third Brake Light (Center Mount) Dome Lamp With Spot Lights
To change the bulb, proceed as follows: To change the bulbs, proceed as follows:
1. For versions with tailgate, loosen the two fastening 1. Remove dome lamp by depressing the tabs located by
screws and extract the cluster. the arrows, using a suitable tool.
2. For versions with swing doors, remove rubber plugs,
remove retaining tabs and extract the cluster.
3. For versions with high roof and swing doors, remove
the pressure-fit plastic guard and rubber cap using a 7
screwdriver, release the retaining tags as shown in the
figure and remove the unit.
4. Remove the appropriate tabs and remove the bulb holder.
5. Remove the snap-fitted bulb and replace it.
License Plate Lights
Proceed as follows to replace the bulbs:
Dome Lamp Assembly
1. Disengage the holding tabs and remove the lens by 2. Open protective cover.
lifting to the left.
2. Remove the bulbs by releasing them from the side
contacts; insert the new bulbs and make sure they are
correctly clamped between these contacts.
Rear Roof Lamp
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:
1. Remove roof lamp by depressing the tabs located by the
arrows, using a suitable tool.
Dome Lamp
1 — Protective Cover
2 — Bulbs
3. Replace the bulbs releasing them from the side contacts

making sure that the new bulbs are correctly secured Roof Lamp
between the contacts. 2. Open the cover.
4. Close the protective cover and reposition it back into its
housing, making sure that it locks into place.
7
Roof Lamp (Reverse Side) Roof Lamp (Reverse Side)
1 — Cover 1 — Bulb
3. Replace the bulb releasing them from the side contacts 4. Close the protective cover and reposition it back into its
making sure that the new bulbs are correctly secured housing, making sure that it locks into place.
between the contacts.
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
2.4L Engine 16 Gallons 60.5 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
2.4 Liter Engine (SAE 0W-20, API Certified) 5.5 Quarts 5.2 Liters
Cooling System*
2.4 Liter Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 7.2 Quarts 6.8 Liters
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula)
* Includes heater and coolant reservoir filled to MAX level.
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part

Engine Coolant We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent meeting the re-
quirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
Engine Oil – 2.4L Engine We recommend you use SAE 0W-20 API Certified Engine Oil, meeting the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395 such as Mopar, Pennzoil, and
Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use a Mopar Engine Oil Filter.

Spark Plugs – 2.4L Engine We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs.
Fuel Selection – 2.4L Engine 87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol.
CAUTION! CAUTION! (Continued)

• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than speci- (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as
fied Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant soon as possible.
(antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may • Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Tech- coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
nology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and 7
be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology
(HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally may plug the radiator.
compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine • This vehicle has not been designed for use with
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling sys- propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
tem in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (anti-
drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant freeze) is not recommended.
(Continued)
Chassis

Automatic Transmission Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or equivalent.
Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your
transmission.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use Mopar DOT 4.
The fluid must be changed every 24 months. This interval is time based only,
mileage intervals do not apply.
Power Steering Reservoir Use Pentosin CHF 11S power steering fluid meeting FCA Material Standard
MS-11655.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
䡵 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326 ▫ Maintenance Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327
8
326 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), 350 hours of engine
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
run time or twelve months, whichever comes first. The 350
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
for fleet customers.
scheduled maintenance.
Severe Duty All Models
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that service Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle
is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions such as is operated in a dusty and off road environment or is
frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extended engine idle time, operated predominantly at idle, or only very low engine
extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures will influence RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty.
when the “Oil Change Required” message is displayed.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
Severe Operating Conditions can cause the change oil
message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) • Check engine oil level.
since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as • Check windshield washer fluid level.
possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular wear,
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than
your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by • Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir and brake
referring to the steps described under “Oil Change Reset” master cylinder, fill as needed.
in “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your • Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
Instrument Panel” for further information.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 327
Maintenance Chart At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Required Maintenance Intervals Change Indicator System:
Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following page • Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as
for the required maintenance intervals. required
• Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses,
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil lines and park brake
Change Indicator System: • Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses
• Change oil and filter • Inspect exhaust system
• Rotate the tires • Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or
Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it off-road conditions
occurs before the oil indicator system turns on
8
100,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
110,000
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
112,000
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV joints. X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, boot seals, tie rod ends,
X X X X X X X
and replace if necessary.
Inspect the brake linings, parking brake function. X X X X X X X
328 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
100,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
110,000
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
112,000
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
Inspect front accessory drive belt, tensioner, idler pul- 96,000 X

ley, and replace if necessary.
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air cleaner filter. * X X X X X
Replace air conditioning/cabin air filter. X X X X X X X
Change brake fluid every two years.** X X X X X X X
Replace spark plugs.*** X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or
X X
150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes first.
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. X
* Change engine air filter every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) if *** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
operated in dusty and off road environment. yearly intervals do not apply.
** The brake fluid must be changed every 24 months. This
interval is time based only, mileage intervals do not apply.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 329
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle
could result in a component malfunction and effect
vehicle handling and performance. This could cause
an accident.
8
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR ▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332 Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334
▫ Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332 ▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332 䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332 䡵 MOPAR PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332 䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
▫ FCA USA LLC Customer Center . . . . . . . . . . . .333 ▫ In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. . .335
9
▫ FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center. . . . . . . . . . .333 ▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
▫ In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333 䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
▫ Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands. . . . . . . . . .333
332 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
YOUR VEHICLE The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
Prepare For The Appointment interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to bring the
right papers with you, as well as your warranty folder. All Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer. We
work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty. strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an autho-
Discuss additional charges with the service manager. Keep rized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and are most
a maintenance log of your vehicle’s service history, as this concerned that you get prompt and high quality service.
can often provide a clue to the current problem. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the facilities,
factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the latest
Prepare A List
information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the timely manner.
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident or
work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer
service advisor know. service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with
this process.
Be Reasonable With Requests
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
If you list a number of items and you must have your general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the They want to know if you need assistance.
service advisor and list the items in order of priority. At
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the concern,
many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle
you may contact the manufacturer’s customer center.
at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is
advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an
appointment.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 333
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer center In Mexico Contact
should include the following information: Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
• Owner’s name and address
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
Mexico, D. F.
• Authorized dealer name
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands
FCA USA LLC Customer Center
Customer Service Chrysler International Services LLC
P.O. Box 21–8004
P.O. Box 191857
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
San Juan 00919-1857
Phone: (866) 726-4636 9
Tel.: (787) 782-5757
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center
Fax: (787) 782-3345
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three
Impaired (TDD/TTY) weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have any
questions about the service contract, call the manufactur-
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
er’s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800-
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunica-
521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800) 465-2001 English /
tion Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer center.
(800) 387-9983 French).
Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who has access
to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the The manufacturer will not stand behind any service con-
United States, can communicate with the manufacturer by tract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It is not
dialing 1-800-380-CHRY. responsible for any service contract other than the manu-
facturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract, and
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by
you require service after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle
Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for
Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the contract
Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell
documents, and contact the person listed in those docu-
Relay Service operator.
ments.
Service Contract
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has
help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
expires. The manufacturer stands behind only the manu- the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
facturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a manufac- sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
turer’s service contract, you will receive Plan Provisions concerns.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 335
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
WARNING!
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle compo- If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
nents contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids con- Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying
tained in vehicles and certain products of component FCA US LLC.
wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
reproductive harm. a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
WARRANTY INFORMATION in individual problems between you, your authorized
See the Warranty Information Booklet, for the terms and dealer or FCA US LLC.
9
provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to this To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety
vehicle and market. Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Admin-
MOPAR PARTS
istrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West
Mopar fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are avail- Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain
able from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for other information about motor vehicle safety from
your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at http://www.safercar.gov.
its best.
In Canada Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams, charts
should contact the Customer Service Department imme- and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals make it
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on
defect to the Canadian government should contact computer-controlled vehicle systems and features. They show
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations exactly how to find and correct problems the first time, using
and Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http:// step-by-step troubleshooting and drivability procedures,
www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/. proven diagnostic tests, and a complete list of all tools and
equipment.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
Owner’s Manuals
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Master-
assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
card, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted.
you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included are
Service Manuals starting, operating, emergency and maintenance proce-
dures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips.
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor-
mation that students and professional technicians need in Call toll free at:
diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintain- • 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.)
ing, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A
complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system, • 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
and/or components is written in straightforward language Or
with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
INDEX
10
338 INDEX
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . .297 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
Air Bag Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42 Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Driver Knee Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43 Audio Systems (Radio). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
Enhanced Accident Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279 Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279 Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11, 184
If A Deployment Occurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186, 188, 303
Knee Impact Bolsters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42 Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303, 324
Maintaining Your Air Bag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49 Fluid And Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68 Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
Air Bag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71, 136 Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302, 303
Air Bag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49 Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302, 324
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter). . . . . .290 Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291 Auto Up Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Air Conditioning Filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172 Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) . . . . . . . . .108
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . .171, 173 Axle Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291, 292
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291 Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137, 290
Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290 Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218 Keyless Key Fob Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 Belts, Seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 Body Builders Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296, 322 B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
INDEX 339
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201 Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324 Chart, Tire Sizing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
Brake, Parking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198 Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light). . . .285
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200, 300 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200 Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301, 324 Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301 Child Restraints
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198 Booster Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139 Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188 Child Seat Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316, 317 How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt . . . . . . . . .59
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73, 316 Infants And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Locating The LATCH Anchorages . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107 Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children . . . . . . . .55
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322 Older Children And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . .52
Caps, Filler Seating Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236 Cigar Lighter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 10
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283, 288 Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198 Cleaning
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298 Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70, 236 Climate Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Cargo Tie-Downs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Car Washes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304 Cold Weather Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166 Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237 Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334
340 INDEX
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap). . . . . . . . . . . . .298 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296 Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297 Disposal
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299 Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Disposal Of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299 Door Ajar Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Drain, Flush, And Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296 Door Locks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296, 299 Doors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Points To Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299 Driving
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298 Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Standing
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298 Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . .296, 322
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304 Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) . . . . . . . . .108
Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149 Electric Rear Window Defrost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332 Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152 Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
Electronic Range Select (ERS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92 Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286 Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . .99
Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71 Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light . . . . . . . . .135
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284 Emergency, In Case Of
Dipsticks Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
INDEX 341
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276 Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70, 236
Emission Control System Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . .285 Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70, 294
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283 Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186 Filters
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68 Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287 Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289, 322
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296 Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70, 236 Flashers
Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185 Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185 Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73, 148
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233 Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272 Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287, 322 Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283, 288 Fluid Capacities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289 Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73 10
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288, 322 Fluid Level Checks
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289 Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
Engine Oil Viscosity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288 Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . . .322
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288 Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . . .279 Four-Way Hazard Flasher. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
Ethanol. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
342 INDEX
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233 Guide, Body Builders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235 GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233 Hazard
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236 Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233 Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141 Hazard Warning Flasher. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233, 322 Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322 Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322 Heated Seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309 Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
Hill Start Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236, 285 Hitches
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233 Holder, Cup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233 Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
Gear Select Lever Override. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277 Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166, 232 Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308 Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238, 240 Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238, 240 Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
INDEX 343
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122, 134, 148 Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73, 316
Instrument Cluster Display Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73, 91
Instrument Cluster Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124 Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71, 136
Instrument Panel And Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121 Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308 Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
iPod Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164 Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
iPod/USB/MP3 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164 Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Bluetooth Streaming Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164 Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272 Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . . .146
Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92, 149
Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . .16 Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Key-In Reminder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . .143 10
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73, 148
Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93 Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . .134, 148
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237, 239
Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73 Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73 Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225 Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
344 INDEX
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292 Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233, 322
Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253 Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
Oil Change Indicator, Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290 Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287, 322
Maintenance Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286 Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326 Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . . .146, 285 Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
Manual, Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336 Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233 Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289, 322
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78 Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80 Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80 Materials Added To . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79 Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79 Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288, 322
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78 Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288, 322
Monitor, Tire Pressure System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229 Oil Filter, Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286, 335 Oil Filter, Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233 Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91 Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68 Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
INDEX 345
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . . .4, 336 Recreational Towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
Reformulated Gasoline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
Paint Care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304 Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198 Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
ParkSense System, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102 Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . . . .165
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
Personal Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152 Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
Placard, Tire And Loading Information . . . . . . . .212, 213 Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
Power Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80 Restraint, Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197, 198 Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Preparation For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Pretensioners Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335 10
Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219 Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap). . . . . . . . . . . . .298 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Radio Frequency Schedule, Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 Seat Belt
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . . . . .34
Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107 Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Rear ParkSense System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102 Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
346 INDEX
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334
Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35 Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
Seat Belt Pretensioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 Shifting
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308 Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28, 70 Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73, 148
Adjustable Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . . .34 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221, 222, 223
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28, 29, 32 Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70 Specifications
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Fuel (Gasoline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35 Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 Speed Control
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 Accel/Decel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136 Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Speed Control (Cruise Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85 Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
INDEX 347
Steering Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197, 198 Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212, 214
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98 Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98 Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165 Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . . .165 Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172, 316 Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207, 217
Supplemental Restraint System - Air Bag. . . . . . . . . . .40 Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221, 223
Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98 Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98 Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
Tire And Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . .212, 213 Tire Safety Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207 Tire Service Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255 10
Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72, 217, 221, 227 Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
Aging (Life Of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212, 217 Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226 Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222 Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217, 221 Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219 Towing Vehicle Behind A Motorhome . . . . . . . . . . . .248
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218 Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
348 INDEX
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202 Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
Trailer Towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248 Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214, 237, 239
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242 Vehicle Modifications/Alterations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243 Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172, 316
Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247 Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242 Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
Trailer Towing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242 Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242 Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
Transaxle Washers, Windshield. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96, 294
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11, 184 Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188 Water
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186, 188, 302 Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302 Wheel And Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68 Wheel And Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224 Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131 Window Fogging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Uconnect Voice Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174 Windshield Defroster. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227 Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96, 294
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
INDEX 349
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Wiper Blade Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
Wrecker Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276
10
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
EQUIPMENT routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
Special design considerations are incorporated into this only fully shielded coaxial cable.
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
nel. The following must be observed during installation. Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible. All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
The negative power connection should be made to body ence between the communications equipment and the
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection. vehicle’s electronic systems.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS®
17VM-126-AD
©2017 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Fourth Edition
Ram is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. Printed in U.S.A.

Work Van

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Work Van

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Work Van

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2017

2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 2

3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 3

4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 4

5 STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 5

6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 6

7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 7

8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 8

To order duplicate keys, please contact the authorized

WARNING! WARNING! (Continued)

Power Door Locks

The control on the left front door panel has up-down

SLIDING SIDE DOOR Unlocking With The Key Blade

Child Lock System If the power is restored:

WARNING! WARNING! (Continued)

WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued)

Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle

Pulling Out The Latch Plate

Pregnant Women And Seat Belts

Child Size, Height, Weight or Age Recommended Type of Child Restraint

Child Size, Height, Weight or Age Recommended Type of Child Restraint

Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints

Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH

Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH

The lower anchorages are round bars that are

Passenger Vehicle Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped

1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating position.

ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS

CAUTION! • Do not leave children or animals inside parked

WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued)

Power Mirror Controls

Sun Visor (Passenger Side Shown)

Forward And Rearward Adjustment

1. Locate the release lever (upper outboard side of seat),

Seat Release Lever

Seatback Release Lever

Extended Cargo Space

Heated Seat Control Button

Rear Head Restraints

Center Head Restraint

WARNING! Hood Release Lever

Hood Prop Rod

NOTE: When the headlights are turned on, the Daytime

Cargo Vehicle Interior Lamp Locations

Passenger Vehicle Interior Lamp Locations

Windshield Wiper Lever

ParkSense Rear Park Assist Sensors Location

Load Compartment Power Outlet Underhood Power Outlet Fuse Locations

CAUTION! 1 — #85 Fuse 15A Blue Rear Power Outlet 12V

Overhead Console Storage Location

Rear Cargo Tie-Downs (Passenger Version)

1 — Air Outlet 7 — Upper Dash Storage 13 — Climate Controls

Red Telltale What It Means

Red Telltale What It Means

CAUTION! CAUTION! (Continued)

Green Telltale Indicator Lights

Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped

Cruise Control Engaged Indicator Light — If Equipped